JP2018171151A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine including a satisfactory function of preventing fraudulence.SOLUTION: An inverted cup part 178 and a binding movable member 180 are arranged in a passage that is in danger of insertion of a piano wire. The inverted cup part 178 and the binding movable member 180 are configured to be capable of suppressing entry of the piano wire in a plurality of places, thus enhancing a fraudulence prevention effect.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 93

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention part for preventing fraud against an illegal act of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26573 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the function of preventing fraud. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a good function of preventing fraud.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured such that a gaming means used during a game and a side opposite to the gaming means are open, and the gaming means can be received from the one side. Receiving means, and the receiving means includes arranging means arranged on a path communicating between the gaming means and the outside, and the arranging means allows the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations. Configured to be controllable.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the placement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at the first location, and an external from the outside at the second location. The second means for suppressing the entry of the member suppresses the entry of the member from the outside in a different manner.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the disposing means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed from a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the function of preventing fraud can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the anti-fraud function can be improved by changing the anti-fraud method.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the fraud prevention function can be improved by the shape of the arrangement means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is XIVc− in FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in a XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (a) is a front view of a drive device, (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a cancellation | release member and a rotation claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, (c) is a side view of a cancellation | release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a cancellation | release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the arrow LIXc direction view. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibration apparatus in the LXa-LXa line | wire of Fig.59 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of a right disk cam, (b) is a back perspective view of a right disk cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction view of Fig.67 (a). It is. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view of Fig.68 (a). It is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disc member, a ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of a left disc cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disk cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of a right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, (f) FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the state where the inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (opening) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame in the state where the inner frame was opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state where the inner frame was closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame was opened (deployed). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling components disposed below the window portion of the front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling the constituent members disposed below the window portion of the front frame. (A) is a disassembled rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the bundling movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the bundling movable member are shown side by side. (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line | wire of Fig.94 (a). (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line | wire of Fig.95 (a). (A) is a rear schematic view schematically showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and the harness. It is a back surface schematic diagram shown typically, (d) is an upper surface schematic diagram of Drawing 96 (c). (A) And (b) is a top surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a bundling movable member, and a harness which illustrate a bundling movable member and a harness typically. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area | region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side surface schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of Fig.115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front side assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear side assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, rear side assembly, upper side frame member, main body frame, and upper side board member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), (b) is FIG. 124 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, rear side assembly, upper side frame member, main body frame, and upper side board member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a front view of an inner frame. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG.127 (b). (A) And (b) is the side view of the board surface support apparatus and game board which showed the board surface support apparatus and game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board | substrate surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board | substrate surface support apparatus. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing the ball delivery status by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, (b) is a front perspective view of a cutting metal member showing the relationship between the yarn and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of the ball launch unit, the inner rail, and the outer rail after the launch of the ball. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, (b) is an exploded back perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose-fitting apparatus. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose fitting apparatus. It is a back perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a second effect member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is the partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a back surface perspective view of the loose-fitting apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is the elements on larger scale of the slit member and slide member in another example of 12th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) And (c) is a rear view of a fraud detection apparatus. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part provided in a light guide member in area | region CCVIe of (a).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region configured by a receiving recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can make preparations to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is disposed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following explanation, explanation is given on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). These are the partial front views of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a).

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed in a first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a faces in the up-and-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is moved from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a faces upward and rearward by rising up around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, performed by the player when a specific display (for example, “Press button”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, for example, when the tilting device 310 is pushed by a method of dropping the hand downward as in the case of pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, and to suppress the player's pushing operation by a method of dropping his hand down vigorously.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method to drop the hand vigorously downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG.8 and FIG.9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting apparatus 310 in a player viewpoint is demonstrated. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it cannot be seen in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player viewpoint). Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protection lens member 311i is configured in such a manner that the area of the protection lens member 311i gradually increases, and accordingly, the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12), the difference in the amount of light that can be visually recognized by the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of light and darkness) increases, and the first state and the second state Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed in the vicinity of the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward using the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the side surface portion on the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is pivotally supported so that the tilting device 310 can rotate around a shaft portion 314 disposed at the rear end portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives a direct impact to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It arrange | positions on the outer side of the lower frame member 320 enclosed from the side.

  In this way, by placing a sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, a voice coil motor for applying a driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 can be used largely to tilt. The device 310 can be accommodated in the lower frame member 320. Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end (the back side end in FIG. 12), and the tilting thereof. The lower frame member 320 which has the lower bearing part 323 which supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and the lower frame member 320 which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side. A member having a recessed portion disposed facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. In addition, the upper frame member 330 for determining the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state and the lower frame member 320 are fastened and fixed to the lower side, and the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism are configured. A driving device 340 that transmits a driving force to the tilting device 310 via the movement member 345, and a protective cover device that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and that protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left and right directions. 350.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and a bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member that is horizontally disposed at the upper end of the rear side, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward in the vicinity of the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, a left side detection sensor 324L that is disposed in a pair on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, a right detection sensor 324R, and a horizontal center position in the left and right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 An opening 325 that is an opening that is opened by cutting a portion disposed on the lower side of the portion 322 is mainly provided.

  The bottom plate portion 321 is configured to contact the tilting device 310 so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 and to have a plurality of openings, through which the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. The

  The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the front center, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. An insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically is mainly provided.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and is formed in a U-shape that extends upward from the upper surface and has an open portion on the near side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are disposed at positions where the distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

  In addition, a photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) in which a detection unit can be inserted. And a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

  The opening 325 is a through-hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the lateral width is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f so as to protrude upward and forward (see FIG. 17B), and thus the drive device after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be disposed above the opening 325. Compared to the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is disposed so as to face the opening 331 that is an opening that is hooked by the extending portion 311 h that extends from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 configured to have a semicircular shape with the lower side opened and supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured such that it can be divided in the vertical direction and is covered in three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibration surface directed diagonally forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side And a detection sensor 353R.

  FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center visible.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Accordingly, when the tilting device 310 projects the projecting protruding portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase Can do.

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line | wire of Fig.14 (a). FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case main body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and an upper and lower opening, and a cover on the upper opening of the case main body 311. A lid 312 that is fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front end portion of the lid 312 and hangs downward, and a mode that is sandwiched between rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. A ring-shaped portion that fixes the case main body 311 and the lid 312 in an inseparable manner at the rear end portions of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. A ring member BR1.

  The case main body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side toward the near side in the first state, an opening portion 311b that is opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft to the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d that is a semicircular recess in cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. An insertion groove 311e, which is a groove disposed at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and engages the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair of left and right below the bottom plate portion 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side. A protective lens member 311i formed from a light-transmitting material and having a shape extending along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and disposed on the upper side of the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a. And an overhanging protruding portion 311j that protrudes downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the driving device 340. Is provided.

  The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. However, the overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the front end of the right detection piece 311gR to the front end of the left detection piece 311gL with the shaft portion 314 as the center is approximately 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22)) and the push-in end (see FIG. 23), the left detection piece 311gL is projected in comparison with the right detection piece 311gR.

  The extending portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position that is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It is comprised by the aspect.

  The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from the top (see FIG. 14A), and also has a curved shape when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 14C). The configuration is such that the load when the tilting device 310 is pushed is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging projecting portion 311j is projecting at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes the tilting device 310. In the state (refer to FIG. 29), the tip is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  While the cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 with the rigidity in the axial direction, the cylindrical member 312c cylinders light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6). While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. In addition, a spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided at the center.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the torsion portion, and a center portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions, .

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17A is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a skeleton by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) that are fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, a shaft 341c of the main body member 341, and a first overhanging portion 344c1 or second of the disk cam 344. A release member 346 that abuts the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported coaxially with the release member 346 and relatively moves as the release member 346 rotates. The first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction in which the rotary claw member 347 is tilted down, and the direction in which the release claw member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are separated from each other. And a second spring SP2 that is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a force.

  The main body member 341 is perforated at the same position on the motor housing portion 341a that is bent rearward on the left and right and formed in a U-shape when viewed from the top, and a plate portion that is opposed to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a mode having an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. The extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, the illumination support portion 341e extending from the motor accommodation portion 341a toward the front upper direction, and the illumination support portion 341e An LED device 341f that is disposed at the upper end portion and in which an LED light source is disposed is mainly provided.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on an upper surface portion thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (portion that refracts light). Thereby, it becomes possible to irradiate the light of the LED device 341f uniformly upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

  The fixed member 342a supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 is pivotally supported and the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

  The arm member 345 is drilled in a perfect circle shape at one end and is pivotally supported in a shaft support hole 345a that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344 and a rectangular shape in the other end. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where an end portion on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a contacts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 is rotated one or more times at the opposite end portion. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft bar 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with a rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by an axial movement; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Is mainly provided.

  The cylindrical member 343a includes D-shaped fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. The Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that can move to a position that does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which irregularities are formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the axis from a surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c. Part 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the column member 343a even when the column member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross-section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are constituted by a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having an apex angle of about 100 °.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot be rotated relative to the columnar member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. Thus, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thereby, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

  The movable clutch 343c is normally disposed at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 in a manner to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disc cam 344 is such that the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are substantially mirror-shaped, and only the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR are different, so only the left disc cam 344L. A description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

  20A is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. is there. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a projecting in a cylindrical shape in the inner direction, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and outside the circular rib 344b An engaging rib 344c that protrudes inward as a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two locations, and an outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. A connecting pin 344d that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is formed near the outer periphery are mainly provided.

  The right disc cam 344R is different from the right disc cam 344R only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position that forms an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other is configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

  The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner periphery engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery has a shape that is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

  The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. From the overhanging portion 344c1, the first drawing-in portion 344c1 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (in this embodiment, angle θ1 = 50 °), and the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by the angle θ2 (in this embodiment, angle θ2 = 150 °), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that projects outward in the radial direction again, and the angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle from the second overhanging portion 344c3). (θ3 = 20 °) mainly includes a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

  In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is disposed at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

  FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346. FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

  The state in which the release member 346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b). (See FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From the projecting pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a And an engagement portion 346d configured as a portion protruding with the maximum diameter.

  The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be able to contact the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b that is pierced so as to be able to guide the projecting pin 346b of the release member 346 along the size (including a movement locus of the projecting pin 346b inside), and an end of the second spring SP2 An insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, a flange-shaped portion 347d that protrudes downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and an end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the terminal position in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 21A clockwise) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the push-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion When a load in the push-up direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until the small angle state shown in FIG.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand who operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is disposed before the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. However, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 depends on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits. The player will not be able to return in time, and will push in at a halfway position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in this embodiment, if the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is resisted against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 to be pushed down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. For this reason, there are problems that the product cost increases and space saving cannot be achieved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by a vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. The

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extending direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the voice coil motor 352 is always driven. For example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the player Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated for a predetermined period. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. Thereby, the player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (turning operation) from the first state will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 returns. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates. FIG. 29 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 28 to the end position, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c is in contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 Is illustratedIn FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, while a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be secured. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. ), The first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, so that the release member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward direction to a position where the engagement with the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 is released.

  The change in the posture of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 346d of the engaging rib 344c face each other. The spring 315 is lifted by the biasing force (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) by the urging force of the first spring SP1, and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. The state shown in FIG. At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

  In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be viewed from the player's viewpoint is increased as compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. The light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the light effect can be improved.

  In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the up and down reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly operates up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 28).

  According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction (front direction) toward the player, and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push in the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c). Only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating pawl member 347, thereby rotating the pawl. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the bowl-shaped portion 347d, the rotating claw member 347 is moved to the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player depresses the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 generates a driving force for assisting the raising of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position. Can be used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is formed on the lower frame member 320. The contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released by being buried in the lower surface. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 and pushes it into the terminal end.

  Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, whether or not vibration by the voice coil motor 352 is generated at the end of pushing is determined by the player who pushed the tilting device 310. Can only be grasped.

  Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operation means is lowered.

  On the other hand, this embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

  Here, for example, when the jackpot is confirmed, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to produce a vibration effect, so that the player can improve the expectation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the tilting device 310 is improved. The value as a prefetching means can be improved. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as the operating means can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is moved in the forward rotation direction (reverse to FIG. 29) until the second overhanging portion 344c1 contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 and the engagement rib 344c abut.

  29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. By this method, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (turning motion) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (turning operation) through the second state.

  31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). FIG. 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state. FIG. 33 shows the state shown in FIG. FIG. 34 shows a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. 33. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 and the disc cam 344. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be lifted with a low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed to about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state where the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released) by about 10 degrees. It is possible to make the posture 310 that can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 obstructs the state change (the disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the reverse rotation direction ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33).

  That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the vertical movement mode of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movement (turning movement) shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 is released. Accordingly, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, difference in expectation of jackpot), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310 The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in the tilting device 310. In the state shown in FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and a load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345 does not occur).

  Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being loaded with the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the bowl-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (FIG. 34 clockwise) and subsequently pushing in the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player depresses the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is set to the first state when the player releases his / her hand. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation for setting the disc cam 344 in the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. To do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (turning movements) of the tilting device 310 or continuously perform one of them.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotation cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35 and then forwards to the position where the disc cam 344 contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state rotated counterclockwise (FIG. 35) is shown. In FIG. 37, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. A state where the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of the player's hand that can swing from the top to the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c is engaged with the engaging portion of the release member 346. 346d abuts. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide long hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 35 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotary claw member 347 Regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotation cam 344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 5, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

  In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the second initial state shown in FIG. 36 is passed. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the up and down operation (turning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

  Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 can perform an operation of keeping the hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special indication such as “long press”. is there.

  This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that pushed the excessive tilting device 310 that concentrates on the production, but in this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (turning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not rotated reversely, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 In the first initial state of the driving device 340 that is turned on (see FIG. 14), the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, since the tilting device 310 does not move up when the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, from the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is kept on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation), the burden on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

  When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is kept on when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be controlled so as to immediately reversely return to the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and it is not necessary to apply a useless load on the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, a player's hand that holds and fixes the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, an upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player holds and tilts the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left untreated, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the disc cam 344 is fixed, the drive motor 342 starts driving, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are interposed. Power is transmitted and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player has intentionally performed an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and notification is made, for example, by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation. However, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and also stop the drive motor 342 early to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled from the state before the phase shift occurs (by the number of steps or the like), the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it can be determined that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 has been turned on. Even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c by restarting the control of the drive motor 352 using the state as an initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342). Control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are matched again.

  Thereby, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a deviation between the operation that the tilting device 310 performs by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be appropriately operated to produce an effect.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 further shows the disc cam from the state shown in FIG. A state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CCW is illustrated. 42 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 further shows the disc cam from the state shown in FIG. A state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 rises toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG.

  This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 toward the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disc cam 344 rotates in the arrow CW direction. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 does not occur. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, both of the operations from the first state shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG. However, the operation differs from that in FIG. 41 or 43.

  For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player notices the mode of control being performed, and the player will be aware of the effects to be executed, which may cause the player to lose interest. In addition, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by the sudden stop of the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the subsequent tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since only the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction by the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the production changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, the player can produce an effect. Since the change in expectation can be grasped, the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 enters the second state (see FIG. 38) and the drive motor 342 moves toward the first state. Can be directed to watch over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive are driven by the player operating incorrectly when driving the drive motor 342. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

  Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to produce an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden imposed on the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 performs an up / down motion without being regulated by the rotating claw member 347 (third motion mode). explain.

  44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are the engaging portions of the releasing member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 in a reciprocating manner while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, since the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) in accordance with the change in the posture of the release member 346, the tilting device 310 is configured in the manner shown in FIG. When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are not engaged, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases his / her hand. When the claw member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310, an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the position where the ascent is restricted and the vertical motion is continued can be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only after the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether it was moving up or down in the third operation mode.

  As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and released. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the hand is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed in). Assuming that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310, the expectation level of whether or not the jackpot will be hit is recognized. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings when the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

  46A shows a state where the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. 46B shows the state with respect to the release member 2346. Thus, the small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b). (See FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the plate member 2347 and configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47); Is mainly provided. In addition, about the structure which has the function similar to 1st Embodiment in the cancellation | release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted to the rail portion 2347f, and a front end at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that is projected in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and a thickness portion of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (a vertical direction in FIG. 47 (a)) are arranged to overlap. A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a projecting pin 2348d that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c mainly. Prepare.

  The curved portion 2348a has a width that is slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the bending portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state where the bending portion 2348a is fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped part 2348b is similar in shape to the hook-shaped part 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be adsorbed with a bottom plate portion 2311a of a tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. This is a portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

  The projecting pin 2348d is a columnar member that is inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted and fixed into the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348 d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346 e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  In addition to the shaft support hole 347a, the guide long hole 347b, the insertion hole 347c, and the pull-down hole 347e, the rotary plate member 2347 includes a rail portion 2347f that guides the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, a slide A long support hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward direction (see FIG. In a state of being arranged at the terminal position (46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centering on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

  The support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), similarly to the rail portion 2347f. When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the protruding pin 2348d inserted into the support long hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobble.

  The release member 2346 includes a functional long hole 2346e, which is a long hole drilled in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the protruding pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

  The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and the first long hole is configured by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first long hole 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. To slide.

  Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the release member 2346 remains as it is without the time delay for the movement of the release member 2346. Reflected in speed.

  That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 quickly slides, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

  In other words, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. There is no movement. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the rising of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

  FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47 shows a state where the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction (see FIG. 48). The state in which the release member 2346 is returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 after being rotated clockwise (48) is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes in the tilting device 2310 from this state, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are separated from each other due to a change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310. There is nothing to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

  Accordingly, the sliding claw member 2348 is slid at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, so that the sliding claw member 2348 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be lifted and moved at a speed different from that when the tilting device 2310 is lifted and the lifting movement restriction is canceled (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation modes increase, the association between the operation modes and the jackpot expectation level makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means. The degree of attention can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-like portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilt device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is raised by the magnetic force adsorption between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being lifted by the weight of the hand. 48 (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not so large as to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand is lifted in the state shown in FIG. In this manner, the tilting device 2310 can be raised.

  Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to make a difference in the load in the upward direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing in the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

  For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching, so the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 for the player is increased. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pressed by the player or is pressed by the player. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (the rotation of the tilting device 3310). And a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and positioned at the center position in the rotation axis direction on the opposite side of the right detection piece 311gR. The extension length of the left detection piece 3311gL is longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR, and the extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state where the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. (The left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right side The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, it is in the middle of pushing. Or whether it is in the middle of returning.

  That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

  52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 52A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state. . 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (Left side detection sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is disposed at the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, but this is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

  Here, in the case where the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving down. Rather than causing the collision, the voice coil motor 352 is allowed to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up, so that a load that effectively lifts the tilting device 3310 can be applied.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 3310 can be used by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is lifted only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the tilting device 4310 detects an operation speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that protrudes in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case body 4311.

  The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the push-down operation of the operation device 4300 in time series. 54A, the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54A, and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. A state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is directed in a direction in which the front detection piece 4311k can pass. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54B by pushing the tilting device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54A, the front detection piece 4311k is connected to the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether or not the voice coil motor 352 is driven is selected based on the determination.

  Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with an operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for decelerating, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure when the player pushes in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak power or a player who decides to push in gently, the reaction force always becomes large near the push-in position, and it becomes a burden of the push-in operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing intervals at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thus, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the interval of the timing at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is On the other hand, when the above-described timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

  Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. Push-in operation is possible.

  Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. In other words, the control is performed in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide in the middle of pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  55 (a) and 55 (b) is a side view of the operation device 4300. FIG. 55A shows a state where the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

  In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the overhanging projection of the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of the tilting device 4310 reaching the pushing end from the first state. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

  By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 has a structure in which a load is applied by electromagnetic force rather than a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in the case of a disc brake, so that damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is The reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state.

  Accordingly, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state toward the push-in end while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 contacts the voice coil motor 352. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the push-in end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed down to the end of the pushing operation, it is possible to produce an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

  Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is applied to the lower frame member 5320. , A drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

  56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, compared to the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured similarly to the first embodiment.

  The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 is made of a flexible material while accommodating a transmission device 5410 that rotates and drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410. A flexible member 5420 that is formed in a bottomed dish shape having an open upper surface, and accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate sections and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430.

  The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is a fan shape and whose rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is disposed in a pair of left and right sides on the side where the shaft extends and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is pivotally supported eccentrically with the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side of the drive motor 5411 inserted along the axial direction, and a main body portion 5421 in an assembled state. And a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting in a pair of rib shapes and a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting left and right on the open side of the main body portion 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a protruding leg portion 5424 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a pair of columnar shapes.

  The main body 5421 has a container-shaped depth that is the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end surface on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, and the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides are equivalent to the arrangement of the posture maintaining parts 5423 on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance increases as compared to the lower rib-like leg 5422.

  Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projecting in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilt of the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion that is adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is housed. 5432 and a groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432.

  When the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (an assembly load release state), the depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is increased from the upper surface. The depth is such that the protruding leg 5424 protrudes.

  The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed outward from the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and is a flexible member. When 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth interferes with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

  The groove 5433 has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth that extends slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. The

  59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player by three times from the first state, An ending area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the end position of the push-in, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the projecting leg 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the center axis of the arc of the lower bearing 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second housing portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the projecting leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center line of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction view. For this reason, the convex leg 5424 can be pushed right and left evenly on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right on the paper surface in FIG. 59B) when pushed. The convex leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d that are pierced so that the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through hole 5321d has a width in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the protruding leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the projecting leg portion 5424 can be easily translated in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 59B).

  FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. In FIG. 60A, the assembly load release state is illustrated, and in FIG. 60B, the protruding leg 5424 is in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). The assembled load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is illustrated. In addition, the external shape of the 2nd accommodating part 5432 and the weight member 5412 is illustrated with an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), when the vibration device 5400 is loaded from the assembled load released state and becomes the assembled loaded state, the projecting leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are provided. 5422 is deformed, and the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force that pushes back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 comes closer to the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is operated. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be reduced. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at a high speed.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in becomes slow. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load release state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when driving of the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembly load released state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 does not occur.

  Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and transmitted to the housing member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced up and down by the deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body part 5421 changes to a state of being compressed further up and down, and the rib-like leg 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the vibration attenuation effect by the rib-like leg 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and at a uniform interval from side to side from the central axis. Since the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer end of the rib-like leg portion 5422 is moved to the left and right outer sides (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portion 5422). It is deformed in such a manner that it moves in the direction of smaller resistance (see FIG. 60B). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide is partially reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 below the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. Thereby, the position shift of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a).

  61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft. In b), a state in which the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation shaft is illustrated. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the state of the vibration device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and occupies the terminal area S52 is illustrated.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated to a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. An axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in an assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof abuts (rubs) against the second housing portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the assembly load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward ). This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412. The flexible member 5420 faces the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction of movement of the tilting device 310). Force to push back in the direction).

  As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By configuring with a combination of generated forces, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

  That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the time when the tilting device 310 starts to contact the protruding leg 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A). After the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force to push back the tilting device 310 can be increased particularly in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the lightness of the operation of the tilting device 310 and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be favorably achieved. This adjustment can be performed in a state where the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) varies depending on the detection timing. ) Is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight members 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

  As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation shaft is raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 by the radius Ra. Thereby, compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61A) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered from the state shown in FIG. 61A), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is set. The movable region of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the convex leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper part of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Accordingly, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although description is omitted in the present embodiment, a force to push back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). In addition, it is possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed and the transmission range of the vibration can be expanded. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to, for example, a portion touching the housing of the pachinko machine 10 other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

  That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player. Thereby, the situation where a vibration is not transmitted to a player can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 is used only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the player's pushing operation is detected. Therefore, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

  That is, when the player performs a push-in operation in such a manner that the player releases his / her hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse-pushing manner), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of vibration is not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and ready to generate vibrations, vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pushing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by vibration.

  Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

  Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by the pushing of the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 is different from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft bar 5343. Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L are configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft bar 5343 are disposed at a connection portion with the transmission shaft bar 5343. It is.

  That is, the right disc cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape from the disc portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and an axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. Along the long hole recess C1 that is recessed from the disk portion in the shape of an axially symmetric long hole, and the axis of the support cylinder portion P1 that is recessed by the long hole recess C1. A pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 extending from the end in the direction toward the disc portion side along the axial direction.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter thereof equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft bar 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is the same in the axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). Configured as a part to

  The long hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1.

  Moreover, the surface which the long hole recessed part C1 opposes is comprised from the shape engaged with D shape of the fixing | fixed part 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

  The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes in a direction close to the arm portion on the other side from the surface of the pair of arm portions that faces the other arm. . The engaging projection A1a engages with the tip of the columnar member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft bar 5343, and prevents the columnar member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

  The distal end shape of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). Thereby, compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured long.

  The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the shaft in the vicinity of the shaft. The side surface of the opening side of C1 and the surface position are arranged.

  Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outer side of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63 (b)), the length that the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is longer than the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. (See FIG. 65B).

  Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for inserting the e-ring (a space necessary for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (a direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. Thereby, the design freedom degree of the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft bar 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 5343. A difference between the transmission shaft bar 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a columnar member 5343a.

  The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 interposed between the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring and a groove for fitting the e-ring, and the fitting groove When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in 5343a3, the engagement groove 5343a4, which is the groove with which the engagement convex part A1a of the clamping arm part A1 is engaged, is mainly used. Prepare. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

  Since the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part of the cylindrical member 5343a having a diameter partially increased by the e-ring, the cylinder is inserted before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  With this diameter being uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b. And the e-ring can prevent the disc cam 5344 from shifting in the axial direction.

  With the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343, the columnar member 5343a is defined as the side where the engagement convex portion A1a is disposed on the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344. Insert from the opposite end to a position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusion 5A4 is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a. The sandwiching arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be increased. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65B).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a view of the right disc cam 5344R along the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 66 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  FIG. 66 shows a deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player overloads the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R, and the disc In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the columnar member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the columnar member 5343a is configured such that it can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 are opposed to each other, the resistance of the column member 5343a to fall down is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected. Are in contact with each other, and the resistance of the column member 5343a to fall down is increased.

  Accordingly, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (for example, when the player forcibly presses down (pulls up) the tilting device 310), the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) When the load for restricting is applied), the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

  That is, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction with a small resistance. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On the plane parallel to the plane of the disc portion, the disc portion is tilted about the support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. Thereby, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.

  67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), for easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R that is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is illustrated by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the finished state is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from displacing the tilting device 310. As a result, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L about to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-described shaft collapse deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axis collapse deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft collapse deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to move and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the shaft support of the arm member 345 is moved by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to fall down to absorb this.

  Due to the shaft tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d is tilted with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a), so that the center Pb on the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right-round. The position is displaced along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R with the dimension Rd, the drive motor is held while the tilting device 310 is gripped. When driving 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed, the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, and therefore the player drives the driving motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in the direction to repel it, the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 in the direction to repel it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Accordingly, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or Of any elastic force of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, so that the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. Can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a line-symmetric shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point (a direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point). Since the elongated hole C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of displacement of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can fall down and deform with resistance.

  68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), for easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R that is inserted and fixed perpendicularly to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the finished state is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R regardless of whether or not the tilting device 310 is in the second state. The tip end of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the tilting of the shaft, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. As a result, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  The matters described as the right disc cam 5344R are also the same as the left disc cam 5344L.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped by the player, resulting in overload. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation with respect to the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, when the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the right detection sensor. Since the input to 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

  In this case, it takes a period of time to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs until the occurrence of the overload, so that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is caused. The occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66 (a)). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. In addition, the input unit is arranged in such a manner as to protrude toward the support cylinder part P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thereby, it can be judged at an early stage whether the disc cam 5344 is overloaded by determining the output from the notification device E1.

  Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib, and the engagement rib. 344c is composed of another member and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured to have a mirror shape with respect to the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L. The description of the right disk cam 6344R is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  As with the first embodiment, the left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL, and a disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the columnar member 343a, and the disc member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

  The disc member 6344L1 has an annular shape in the axial direction at a position where the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is disposed at the center position of the disc portion and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to project along.

  The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape that has the same outer peripheral diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and whose inner peripheral diameter is slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and its circular shape. A lid plate portion 6344h that is disposed at an axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. Receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed on the radially outer side of the thickened portion.

  Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, whereby the central shaft portion 344a. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the center.

  Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is in contact with the annular rib 6344f. Thereby, compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1, the contact area can be reduced, and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disc member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (in a mode in which the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c and the receiving gear teeth 6344i is set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343. The second transmission device 6348 is an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the column member 343a, and the auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

  71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36. In FIG. 72, the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. 73 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state illustrated in FIG.

  Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is moved by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the fixed position by the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the reaching position when the tilting device 310 moves up instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) is the second state. It was limited to the position (refer FIG. 34) to arrange | position.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connection pin 344d that is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, the engagement rib 344c, Can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) in the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to change the position to reach and reach (without waiting for the rotation of 344).

  Thereby, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in a manner in which the expectation degree of the effect is changed by the difference in height that the tilting device 310 rises instantaneously from the first state and reaches, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 rises higher or to raise the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 has a lower rising arrival position.

  However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation reaches the maximum, the expectation degree is reached. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is lifted, so that the player watches the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be directed. Therefore, regardless of the production mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the gaming method of operating the tilting device 310 in a disorderly manner.

  Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 has a disk member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which relative rotation is possible. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, characteristics of a disc cam 7344 used as an alternative to the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. FIG. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. The right disc cam 7344L is configured by a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disc member 7344R1. Ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member, and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits in the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engaging member 7344R3.

  The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and includes a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the radially outer side, and an engagement rib. 344c is a member that has a shape that is partially omitted (a portion between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first drawing-in portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disc member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state with a surface, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. Between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deep in the axial direction, and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing projecting radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. The projection 7440 is mainly provided.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first drawing-in portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1 from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431. And a return portion 7433 configured to project to the second long hole 7432 side with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

  The dimension of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the dimension of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

  The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed to be movable outward of the second long hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is projected, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. And a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through-hole formed at the center.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. The Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

  The thick wall portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (do not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75A). However, it is made slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while the engagement member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick-walled portion 7520 is recessed at an equal interval in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, equally divided by 5) outwardly in the deformed through-hole 7521 formed in the axial direction and radially outward. And an equally-divided recessed portion 7522.

  The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is formed on a radially outer side than the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Composed.

  77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is disposed radially outside the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). Arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the rear side end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 77 (b)) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610, and the extending The engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620, and the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 are disposed. A coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

  The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing projection 7611 that is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the side surface on the inner peripheral side.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extended portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended tip is The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

  The engaging portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick wall portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

  As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78F is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78F is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78E.

  78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c), and 78 (d) illustrate a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d), and 78 (f).

  As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first long hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the dimension in the width direction of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the engaging part 7630, so that the engaging part 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

  Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432 to the position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 are aligned in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

  In this moved position, the fixed projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 is restrained from being displaced in the circumferential direction (FIG. 78 (d) left-right direction) of the disk member 7344R1 and engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78B). Next, when the engagement member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In a state where the second elongated hole 7432 enters the inside, the tip of the return portion 7433 comes into contact with the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3. The contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). ) (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extending portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, since the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the position of the engagement member 7344R3 from shifting during the operation.

  After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the direction D7 directed radially outward by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

  The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the process described above. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown in the center. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotation claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide long hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be a movement end at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c contacts and passes from below.

  The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (FIG. 79 (a) clockwise). Are illustrated in time series.

  FIG. 79A shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R comes into contact with the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79B, FIG. ) Shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R is further rotated, and FIG. 80A shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2. 80 (b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). In FIG. 81, the right disk cam is changed from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after 7344R rotates in the reverse rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 ( A small angle state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79A, in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form the arcuate plate portion 7610 in a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is in a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 is rubbed against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. It arrange | positions (refer Fig.80 (a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 is rotated toward the small angle state by the rotation of the disc cam 7344, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. Therefore, based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the circumferential load is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally recessed portion 7522 that was originally arranged to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so the disk member 7344 R 1 and the ring member 7344 R 2. And the relative rotation of the phase by one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 is released, so that the engagement member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated shifts.

  That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 81 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided. It can be relatively shifted by an arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a), and FIG. 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown in the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

  82 (a) to 83 (b) show the time series of how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) counterclockwise direction). FIG. 82A shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other. In FIG. 82B, the engagement member 7344R3 is located above the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state where the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In (b), a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) timepiece. When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. It will only be done.

  Therefore, a load that pushes the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction does not occur, and the engagement member 7344R3 is in the radially outward direction after the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it is separated. Maintain overhanging state. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

  From these configurations, it is possible to switch whether or not the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform an effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

  In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Therefore, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

  As a result, a state not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a state where it cannot be seen by the player. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, according to the present embodiment, it will be described that a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is illustrated. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state illustrated in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. In FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging portion 346d in both of FIGS. 84 and 85. The contact state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately released (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. The moving range of movement can be changed.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 arrives immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) from the first state by the ascending operation can be changed. Thereby, the kind of effect by operation | movement of the tilting apparatus 310 can be increased, and the attention power as an effect device of the operation device 7300 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 179, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described.

  Although the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper will be described as the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, refer to FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (opening) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. In FIG. 90, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides with a wooden plate material as upper and lower sides and an aluminum plate material as left and right sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (such as the hinge 18) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member to have was equipped in the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation front end side. It can be rotated forward as (opening / closing tip side).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated. The moving tip side (opening / closing tip side) can be rotated backward.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010. Respectively.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). When the metal plate having the holes engages with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivotal support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a size that allows fitting. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is supported on the support pin 19a having a small shape).

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (such as the illumination parts 8029 to 8033) and units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in front view (see FIG. 86). By covering the window 14c from the back side with the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And. The fixed frame is formed in a ring shape that is slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b by a synthetic resin, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are bonded to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the laminated glass. Has been.

  The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparent formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. However, the glass unit 16 is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 may be formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the front frame 14, a plurality of electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c. In these lighting parts 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach. The lighting unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c includes a light emitting unit that is turned on at a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that is turned on during payout of the prize ball.

  In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged to bulge toward the near side and are arranged in parallel up and down.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and that guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

  In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 into portions for storing the game balls in a plurality of locations, and as a configuration having only one storage unit that eliminates the lower plate 50 and uses only the upper plate 17. Also good.

  An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as the periphery of the lower dish 50 in addition to the upper dish 17 or may be provided in a plurality of places. Further, the operation device 300 is a push button type switch as an operation method. Alternatively, the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 that communicates with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 that communicates with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( 92).

  At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed. By partitioning 143 left and right by the partition wall 144, a passage entrance of the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 are formed.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging a game ball that has not reached the game area out of the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as a foul ball.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul balls received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flow down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and are then discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected not to the lower plate 50 but to the upper plate 17 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 joins a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player performing a ball removal operation. Formed as follows.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are wiring connectors that conduct electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the inner substrate and one end of the lighting units 8031 and 8032 through the front frame 14. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the part is connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

  The part covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14 has a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031 passing through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn out from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn back through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

  Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89) to the electric decoration unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450. It is possible to easily insert / remove the connector of the conductive wiring and the connector in which one end portion is connected to the internal substrate of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic substrate 14i.

  Multi-function cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are arranged in pairs above and below the front end of the inner frame 12 to support the board surface support device 600 (for holding the base board 60 of the game board 13). 126) and the upper apparatus in the front-rear direction, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation, details will be described later.

  On the back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side opened, and is formed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and between the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a cross-sectional area that decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that configures the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b which is arranged in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is opposed to the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and which forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shapes.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upper extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be further bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

  That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (wave shape corresponding to one cycle of the sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. Projects to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. The possibility that the wiring is disconnected can be reduced.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14 a A reverse cup-shaped reverse cup portion 178 that is a portion formed of a resin material and opens downward is disposed between the upper and lower long plate portions on the rotating base end side of 14.

  For example, the reverse cup portion 178 is a portion that improperly spreads the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and takes measures against fraudulent acts that are caused to enter the game area. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the reverse cup shape of the reverse cup portion 178 from below. Since the progression of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  Moreover, since the reverse cup part 178 and the elongate cover member 173 are formed from a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is entered and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heat and passed through the reverse cup portion 178. 173 also melts. And since the wiring accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out by passing the piano wire whose tip is heated through the long cover member 173, by detecting that the wiring is disconnected. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the reverse cup portion 178 is configured with a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) with each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped downward, the piano wire can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a when entering the reverse cup portion 178 from below. When the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that it is possible to easily detect fraud.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap that is forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire becomes a wall portion. 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire is Guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire proceeds in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (travels in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing an increase in the reaction force given to a person who performs fraud via the piano wire. By disposing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to find out the misconduct before the person who performs the misconduct escapes and to easily secure the person who performs the misconduct. .

  That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who performs the cheating cannot determine it, so it is assumed that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the window portion 14c), the operation of deeply inserting the piano wire is made natural to the person who performs the fraud (piano wire). Without the suspicion that the plug-in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the person who performs the fraud notices that the fraud is detected and tries to escape.

  The detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be disposed on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being disposed on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operation handle 51 may also be used for the determination of the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launch unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 includes an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeder 720 are provided.

  The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the firing rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. In response to the input of an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided. The dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage section 161 and a main body side lower dish passage section 162. The main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 are opened toward the back side so that one end can communicate with a through-hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball paid out from the payout device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. The

  When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door side upper dish passage part 141 is disposed below the main body side upper dish path part 161, and a front door side lower dish path part 142 is disposed below the main body side lower dish path part 162.

  A lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 for restricting outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage section 161 and the main body side lower dish passage section 162, as shown in FIG. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between both a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to prevent the game ball from flowing out and an allowable position for allowing the game ball to flow out.

  Further, a biasing member (coil spring or the like) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the biasing member is biased when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 remains in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 or the main body side lower dish passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 and the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In addition, the board | substrate 167 is comprised by the board | substrate from which the location in which the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arrange | positioned, and the location in which the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main controller 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp controller 113. By doing so, it is based on the intention to prevent malfunction.

  With reference to FIG.91 and FIG.92, the part below the window part 14c of the front frame 14 is demonstrated. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 illustrated by disassembling components disposed below 14c. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window 14 c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14 c, is the front side of the upper plate 17, and is obliquely above and to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 so as to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

  The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and a main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions of the portion 371 and the end portion in the left and right direction toward the sides close to each other in the width direction, and joins at the lower end of the extension and joins the front view V A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, and a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body bending portion 371 and the drooping portion 372, is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the main body bending portion 371 or the drooping portion 372 A translucent portion 373 fastened and fixed to at least one of the first, a left side flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body bending portion 371, and a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body bending portion 371. A right-side flat support portion 375 formed as a groove, and a groove that is recessed in the right-side flat support portion 375 from the back side, and that the recessed width increases (tapered) toward the back side; Is mainly provided.

  The main body bending portion 371 has a curved shape with a rounded front side edge, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a rear side edge, and the upper plate in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts the front edge of the front surface 17 in the front-rear direction and the shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 that is connected to the rear left edge portion 371a. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a shape that matches the front side edge of the lending operation unit 40 that is connected to the rear middle edge portion 371b on the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a. It mainly comprises a back right edge 371c that abuts the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

  The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and between the right corner cover 380 disposed at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap (a shape that abuts the right corner cover 380 with each other). The hanging portion 372 is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later. Fastened to the bottom plate to be formed.

  The translucent portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. At the same time, it is disposed close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs that irradiate light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) and two LEDs that irradiate light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

  Of the LED device 341 f, the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then translucent. Pass through part 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared with that when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

  As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed (in a stepwise manner), while the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Light that can be visually recognized through the translucent part 373 according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 by controlling the light amount to change weakly (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

  The left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electric decoration unit 8031 and the electric decoration unit 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support part 374 toward the electric decoration part 8031. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8031 can be suppressed.

  The right plane support portion 375 is in contact with the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration unit 8032 and the electrical decoration unit 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support 375 toward the electrical decoration unit 8032. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8032 can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the electrical decoration unit 8031 and the electrical decoration unit 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration units 8031 and 8032 An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the electric decoration part 8031, the electric decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide range.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

  Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration unit 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is disposed on the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed in such a manner as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side (with the main body frame 14a sandwiched by another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17)). Fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or sandwiching the main body frame 14a with another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  Even if the sheet metal member 150 has a situation in which the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a situation in which a wire or a piano wire heated at the tip is pressed and melted) has occurred. 14 functions as an entry preventing member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 from the front side. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even when a wire heated at the tip is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the opened front side is a passage forming unit. 140 is mainly provided with a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140, and a flat plate-like plate-like portion 152 that covers the lower surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Even if the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145, even if the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. This can be prevented.

  Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, the wire exemplified in the passage formation unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to open a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the exemplified wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and back is reduced accordingly (a place obliquely above the recessed portion 15a). The case where a through-hole is opened by being performed and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit rear member 155 that is fastened from the rear side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the cylinder lock 20 is disposed in the operation unit rear member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. In addition, a through hole 156 that is formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can be penetrated, and a screw that is formed above and below the through hole 156 and that fastens and fixes the operation unit rear member 155 are inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 drilled side by side in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end than the through hole 156 And an open / close restricting portion 159 that protrudes toward the back side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is disposed so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 protrudes on the back side in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A projecting portion 148a, and a screw insertion portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed in a position that matches the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158, so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit back surface are Alignment with the member 155 is performed, and then the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 is screwed into the screwing portion 148b, so that the operation unit rear member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

  In addition, an L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming a left side edge and a lower side edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the region, and the extending wall portion. 148c is formed in an L-shape that can come into contact with the wall 158a vertically and horizontally in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  Therefore, as positioning when assembling the operation portion back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extending wall portion 148c. By making contact with the left and right surfaces, the position and posture of the operation portion back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

  The open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion that is opposed to the front and rear of the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). There is an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by contacting the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin, and is a cross-sectional view in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. The shape is formed in a U shape. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity compared to the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped opening. Can be reduced. Accordingly, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portion of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, the strength is dependent on the main body frame 14a, so there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible is used. It is possible to ensure the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 while improving formability.

  Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing regulating portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape, as long as it is a shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, it may be a curved (wave) shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section as compared to a flat cross section.

  Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side or is fixed to the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a from the rear surface side. You may comprise from the metal part extended to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 is brought into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. Thereby, the operator who changes the state of the board surface support apparatus 600 and detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of injury by touching the chipping or dent made in the board surface support apparatus 600.

  Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock disposed on the rotation distal end side beyond that. A long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations can be secured. Therefore, in a state where the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating front end side are locked by mistake is reduced. it can.

  As a path through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a path through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is followed.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  Thereby, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. This makes it difficult to prevent foreign matters such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  It should be noted that liquid is considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the game result may apply drinking water or the like to the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the operation device 300 at a reasonable position is likely to be a prey that can be drunk with water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) are out of order. There is a risk.

  Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it becomes the separable independent structure, it can prevent that liquids, such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300, permeate into the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a recessed portion 15a is recessed in a T shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep bottom recessed portion. A gap is formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321 a and the opening 325 correspond to the gap) instead of the complete case shape, and passes through the inside of the operation device 300 and below the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 serves as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly and can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but the other part is covered with the bottom plate portion 321. The liquid stays attached to the vibration surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

  With the above-described configuration, even if the player on the way home is sprayed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play a game as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, the maintenance time of the operation device 300 can be prevented from pressing business hours.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the bundling movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the bundling movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

  93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the bundling movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the upper side, and the bundling movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upper extending wall portion 173c.

  In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are each connected to the bundling movable member 180 without a relay board. Each is guided and bound to the binding movable member 180.

  On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 goes from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A) A pair of highly flexible bundling arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). And a position between the pair of binding arms 183 (intermediate position) and a pair of locking portions 184 capable of locking the binding arms 183. Extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 and having an opening Mainly includes that the temporary retaining portion 185, a.

  The bundling movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the bundling arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with lower flexibility (high rigidity) than at least the bundling arm portion 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a cross-section whose upper side is substantially horseshoe-shaped and has a fixed portion 181a having a through-hole through which a screw passes in the center, and a left and right lower corner portion of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d side. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front-side end portion of the fixed portion 181a and has an extended tip that curves close to the plate member 14d side 181c, a plate-like support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96 (a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed mainly from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 including through holes arranged at positions where the bundling movable member 180 is fixed to coincide with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

  When a screw that penetrates the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the bundling movable member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the bundling movable member 180 relative to the plate member 14d at the time of fixation.

  The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding down by narrowing the distance between the extended end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. A shape that is curved along the arranged circle ensures a large cross-sectional area of a region (region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e has an outer peripheral surface fitted into a portion on the proximal end side of the movable arm portion 182 so that the movable arm portion 182 is attached. The shaft is supported (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is shaped so as to be smoothly connected to the plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape that is connected to the opposite side of the shaft support position of the base end portion 182a.

  The base end portion 182a includes left and right end portions (portions where the straight line connecting the shafts is parallel to the plane OS1) and back side end portion (the uppermost portion of the plane OS1 and the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the rotational direction extend from the approaching portion. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the separation distance between the side walls gradually decreases as it approaches the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained with higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept that does not intend elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept that intends elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. .

  Since the pair of binding arms 183 are each configured in the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small width portion 183a formed with a width equivalent to the width of the base near the tip portion and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that, in the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93B).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening portion 184a with the large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening portion 184a. The small opening 184b is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a is sized to allow the bundling arm 183 to pass without depending on the position of the bundling arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the bundling arm 183 to pass therethrough. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot be passed (locked).

  According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to move relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is reduced). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the small opening 184b side so that the size of the inner area (tightness) surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily increased. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through-hole through which the binding band can be inserted at the center thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band is inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 14.

  94 (a) and 94 (b) illustrate a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and is in contact with the vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing the up-down direction). This angle is normally used according to the situation of pachinko machines 8010 installed at amusement stores (the situation where there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010 if the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more). This is sufficiently larger than the turning angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no, the possibility that the movable arm part 182 may deteriorate and break due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

  Next, a support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 are supported by the bundling movable member 180, the arrangement is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened leftward at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. The That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extending wall portion 173c are the same, it is extended from the upper extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e that is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upper extending wall 173c across the intermediate stopper 181c. The shape of ˜HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the bundling movable member 180. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the shape of the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, thereby preventing extreme bending deformation.

  Further, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, the disconnection by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 being bent can be prevented.

  97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the bundling movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the bundling movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. 97A shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97B shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. A member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically shown by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the bundling movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

  From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the proximal end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 is turned around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since it corresponds to opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96 (d)).

  97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of the vertically long metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96D) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame 14 by forcing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to bypass.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the operator's work during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup 178. Thus, it is possible to take measures against an illegal act of causing the wire to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted to penetrate the wire, and the wire is advanced to the game area side, if the wire proceeds vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the wire becomes hot. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  When the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly detected by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen), etc. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a person who performs an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be launched even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappear. For this reason, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraud is detected after the fraud has been performed (it is possible to detect fraud early).

  In this case, after making the wire enter the game area and messing with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win a prize illegally), the ball is moved to the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to disable the launch of a ball against a person who performs an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific fraud.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, the operation of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button when the harness HN2 is burned out. 43 (see FIG. 89) cannot be operated. Accordingly, a person who performs an illegal act may not be able to collect the banknotes and the remaining amount of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his own fraud. Therefore, deterrence against fraudulent acts can be used.

  In addition, in order to eliminate the possibility that it will not be possible to collect the banknotes inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the amount of the sphere of the card balance, Even though the remaining amount of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, the gaming machine side can easily recognize the cheating.

  In the first place, when the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) is output. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. Is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door side lower pan passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages respectively extended from the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the balls can flow toward the lower plate 50. The S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 each have a direction in which the extending direction is directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once.

  The S-shaped path SL1 allows the flow path length of the front door side lower dish passage part 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that it stays in the front door side lower dish path part 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Because of the large number of balls that can be placed on the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the ball to the player (if the ball for the lower plate 50 minutes is gone, remove the ball from the thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress stress) due to demand for supplementation or the like can be configured.

  The front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 as regions where the extending direction is bent in the vertical direction and the left-right direction, respectively. It has features. That is, the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending portion in which the right and left of the characteristic part are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. Region NEa2.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1, with the right and left of the characteristic portion reversed. . In the description of the characteristic part, the characteristic of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. The ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extends closer to the extending end from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na. The adjacent walls Nc are mainly provided, and each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The adjacent wall Nc is formed such that the surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the wire HM (a small diameter metal typified by a wire or a piano wire) inserted illegally. The details will be described later. The proximity wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the adjacent lower end and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach path for the wire HM that is illegally inserted, a path that travels upstream of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who performs an illegal act advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who performs an illegal act, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142, so that it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 are reversed left and right, so that the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without any leakage.

  An example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin is shown in FIG. Note that the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (clamped), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and further, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and illegal acts can be detected quickly. it can.

  On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and proceeds further, when the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip bulges in a posture facing downward, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 disposed on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area disposed on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  As a result, an illegal payout ball is obtained by causing the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from gaining an illegal profit by forcibly releasing a movable device such as to obtain an illegal payout ball by making it easy to illegally win a prize.

  Returning to FIG. The foul sphere passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the merge region CE where it joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thereby, when the sphere flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is arranged in the merge region CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merge channel CE (the balls enter the merge region CE at the same time). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched and engaged by the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the merge region CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so as to project toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 moves downward.

  In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back-side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is located at the surface position with the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140. The back side bottom plate portion is set to a surface position with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly larger front-rear width than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul sphere passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly smaller front-rear width than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a sphere stays in the foul sphere passage portion 145, the number of stagnation can be increased because a plurality of spheres can be arranged at different positions on the upstream side of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (slightly shifts from left to right and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

  In other words, it is possible to restrict the entry of the balls into the passage portion 145a one by one. Accordingly, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merge region CE at the same time. The possibility of being caught between the upper and lower wall portions can be reduced.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left side wall portion, and the flow surface of the sphere faces rightward. From the inclined plate portion 146a inclined downward, the closing portion 146b closing the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It is mainly provided with a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward as it goes toward the back side.

  While the sphere is guided to the foul sphere passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be brought close to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the sphere rolling down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the sphere from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can do.

  Thereby, the period until the sphere that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the upper and lower bounds of the sphere can be finished before the sphere reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because variation in the vertical position of the sphere can be reduced), the foul sphere passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow smoothly.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) in which the S-shaped path SL2 is formed. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the electrical decoration unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit that is formed to be elongated in the left and right directions, and the left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration part 8031 and the electric decoration part 8032. In this lower support structure, like the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, the tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side is formed at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400. (See FIG. 118), and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed on the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the assembly order to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) respectively provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into the left and right are used as the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the portions are fitted to each other, the heavy plate units 500R and 500L can be prevented from being separated from each other to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 include the main body frame. The state disassembled from 14a is illustrated.

  The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101) and is provided in the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

  The fastening portion 14e1 includes a through hole into which a screw is inserted from the back side, and the screw that passes through the through hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

  The cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510. FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and these heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a main body frame. 14a (refer to FIG. 104), and a plate-like support plate portion 510 that is long in the vertical direction and is fixed mainly.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510 by screws inserted through the support plate 510 from the back side to the front side. In this state, the support plate 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and is assembled. 86 (see FIG. 86), a fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

  The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base plate member 512 in a front view, and a portion of the base plate member 512 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side. The base plate member 511 is in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

  Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the horizontal direction of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R is increased. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extension portion 511a. In the front-rear direction, the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510, while the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed as a side surface of the base portion 511b up to the rear side end, The rear side end of the inner cover member 520 can be disposed at the surface position of the rear side end of the support plate 510, and the inner side 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It contacts with the left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) adjacent to each other. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other from the back of the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light irradiated from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light source 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540. The light entry / exit and the route thereof will be described later.

  The cover side through-hole 513 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 disposed in the inner cover member 520. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510.

  The lens-side through hole 514 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 disposed in the outer lens member 550. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 is set to have a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice as long as the diameter of the protruding portion 566. Accordingly, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projecting portion 566). Even when the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the protrusion 566, the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thus, after the protruding portion 566 is inserted into the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation with respect to the supporting plate part 510, thereby eliminating the positional deviation and easily fastening. Fixing can be performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left double plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light, An inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

  The right heavy plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L, the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, the front side end portion is disposed opposite to the front-rear direction, and the light. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 are arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an outer cover member 560 to be fastened and fixed.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 110 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, and each of the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is shown exploded.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 that is disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. The lower fastening portion 523 is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, the plurality of opening portions 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525, and the inner lens member 530 is formed. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed and projecting on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the back side Support plate 5 0 a plurality of rear fastening portion 527 screws that secure is screwed to, mainly comprises.

  The main body plate 521 has a corrugated front end portion 521a, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b in the corrugated short width portion (portion approaching the rear side). Is provided.

  The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually increase from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening area of the some opening part 524 can be varied, and the effect by light can be varied for every opening part 524. FIG.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction, and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. A fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two locations at the upper end portion and at one location at the lower end portion.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations, and function as a window for viewing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back-side base 521b is curved in a design shape, rightward, between the aforementioned boundary portions. In other words, the surface of the back side base 521b is formed in a wave shape that undulates from side to side as it advances in the vertical direction.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding to the design-like surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity that tends to be a dead space is formed on the reverse side of the design-like projecting portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520. Efficiency can be improved.

  The inner lens member 530 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front side end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in the shape of a long plate up and down substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Is done.

  The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is drilled in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape. And support holes 531b and 531c into which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in the front side portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in the rear portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is disposed on the back side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied near the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

  The main body plate portion 531 includes a through-hole 531d that is drilled in the left-right direction in a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. When the long fastening portion 526 is inserted through the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended in a manner to fill a gap between the light guide member 540 and the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes to the back side. A triangular shape with a tip at the top.

  The inner lens member 530 includes a protruding portion 533 that is formed to protrude from the main body plate portion 531 to the left in a manner that passes through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a that is formed in a wave shape on the side opposite to the overhang side and has a shape that scatters light on the wave-like curved surface.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and is formed on the left and right side surfaces as a halftone dot pattern in which concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LEDs 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear side end portion of the light guide member 540 is changed in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processing portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a and emits it from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a base circle of about 1 mm are dispersedly arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, amorphous olefin type. Resins, polystyrene resins, AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds) can be exemplified. Among these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in luminance distribution can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set such that the thickness of the end portion on the LED 512a side is 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retainability after the heat bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly shifted to the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 and left and right. Also formed from undulating wave shapes.

  The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the degree of a waveform, It is preferable that a curvature radius (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in a curved surface part. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that can give a three-dimensional degree of freedom while maintaining good practical mechanical properties with less distortion after hot bending. .

  The details of the wave shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114). However, the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c adjacent to the inner cover member 520 is located to the left at the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c. It is set as the wave shape of the aspect located in the position between (positioning away from the inner cover member 520).

  As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot-bending a substrate on which a concave portion is formed. As the method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a gold having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state heated to a heating deflection temperature +10 to 40 ° C. of a thermoplastic resin as a base material. This is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be set to 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

  The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process It can suppress that the reflection angle of fluctuates. Thereby, the brightness fall in a light-guide plate and the nonuniformity of brightness distribution can be prevented. Moreover, the distortion to a light-guide plate can be suppressed by setting it as such heating temperature conditions.

  The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate, and a screw that extends vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and is fastened to the outer cover member 560. The fastening portion 542 is mainly provided.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541 a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least on the inner side of the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of staging the effect of light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially in the surface position with the rear side end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 has a main body plate portion 551 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551 so that the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported. An inner cover portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through-holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region that is surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 project to the right. A protruding portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through-holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side And a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions is similar to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551 a that extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wave shape and is slightly displaced from the front end of the light guide member 540 on the front side. In the present embodiment, the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. The

  The front side end portion 551a is protruded to the front side at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve constituting the wave shape, and a plurality of protrusions fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation part 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view to the front side is vertically located on the surface opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front side end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission at the front side end face can be a strip-like light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

  The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep depth of a shape that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided in the outer lens member 550, and is not provided in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area | region (left area | region of the right panel unit 500) facing a player can be expanded.

  The main body plate portion 551 is formed so that the surface facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 540 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on the surface (see FIG. 114B).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

  Accordingly, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate 510 and the light guide member 540 can be prevented from being misaligned, and light can be accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a. Can be made.

  The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. And a plurality of screws having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a long hole portion formed in an oval shape having a lateral width longer than the vertical width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastening portion 562 having a screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces that can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561 At the front side end, it is a receiving surface that can receive the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 that are formed in a long hole shape having a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening that is formed in an inner shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 And a plurality of protrusions 566 that protrude from the main body plate 561 toward the back side.

  The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape that protrudes to the front side by the covering cover 370. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554). Therefore, a path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening portion 565 and the overhang portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, an assembly method of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 113A is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A.

  112 (a) and 112 (b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) illustrate the protruding configuration. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  The assembly of the right panel unit 500 is a state in which the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112B). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the protruding portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the design freedom of the front side front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-described configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R that are disposed at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side rather than the front side surface of the light guide member 540) The number of screws that fasten and fix the light can be reduced, thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws, so that the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be made easy to make it visible in a strip shape.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the screw (fastening location) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that it is erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the optical member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged to the vicinity of the front side front end (near the tapered front end) of the right panel unit 500 can be expanded. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually recognized in the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500 </ b> R forms a parallel surface with each other along the front-rear direction, and is in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, when the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, at least two kinds of assembling procedures can be considered. .

  The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a right heavy plate unit 500R. The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved to the right weight. In this method, the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510 are fastened and fixed. The two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

  As described above, since the assembly and disassembly can be performed in two procedures, the operator who performs maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the working time can be shortened.

  In either case, the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are slid to each other in the plane direction in order to disassemble the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the projecting portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, the configuration in which the projecting portions 551b and 551c are fitted to the support hole 531b is obtained by prying open (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the 500.

  That is, when fixing the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 by fastening a screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and fraud can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and these screws are connected to the front surface. If the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are difficult to disassemble unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be viewed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the production will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In FIGS. 114A to 114C, the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

  The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. It can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side) at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the outer lens member 550 side from the light guide member 540 at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to can be diffused and used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the aspect of the light effect (condensed or diffused) executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, the difference in the aspect of the effect of light does not arise only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 by region or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 by region, it is possible to vary the aspect of the light effect on both the left and right sides. .

  The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the curvature radius of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top in correspondence to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2). Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is larger. , Shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

  As a result, even when there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512 a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512 a that emit the condensed light for each opening 524 is different, so that it can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be changed can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524.

  Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out of the shape is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be increased, and the effect of the light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lower openings 524 is directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114C, the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as a length connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view. The width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the curvature radius R3. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion of the curvature radius R4 is the vertical width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, in a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1, so that light does not enter the opening 524 too much. Therefore, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  In addition, the center point of each curvature radius R1-R4 shown in FIG.114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focus of the light radiate | emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each vertical width W1-W4 in an up-down direction. Is disposed at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the region KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is a belt-like region extending in the front-rear direction and is defined as a region where the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE is the opening 524 adjacent below the region KE. Coincides with the top of. Therefore, the light irradiated on the region KE in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114C).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that it can be visually recognized by the player even if the condensing function is lowered. There is little difference in the amount of light.

  On the other hand, by forming the convex shape to the left side instead of the flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. The durability of can be improved.

  Further, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, where light is diffused inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560 and light is condensed. Can be formed. Thereby, the production effect of the effect of the light visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light viewed through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light viewed through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

  For example, it is also possible to irradiate light inside the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 on the upper and lower sides of the region KE is a concave surface, so that the light emitted rightward from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized in the area KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE is turned ON, and a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made.

  In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the light amount is weak. An effect may be performed using the light reaching the front end.

  In other words, it is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, but can be seen through the front side end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). Then, by setting the expectation degree of the jackpot for the effect high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, the degree of tiredness of the player's eyes can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, while being viewed by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the player who is cheating is not noticed, so that the player who is cheating escapes. Can be prevented.

  In addition, by reversing the left and right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the region KE may be visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

  115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along the CXVb-CXVb line in FIG. 115 (a).

  The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The front end of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire vertical direction. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front side end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a side than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes longer, the taper is further reduced and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a difference between the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions of the support hole 531b and disposed at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the support hole 531b are arranged. Due to the shadow produced by the above, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily seen darker than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface of the light guide member 540 at the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531c is compared to the end surface of the light guide member 540 at the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light upon receiving light irradiated from the LED 512a.

  Therefore, among the plurality of LEDs 512a, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to relieve the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. Thereby, the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 is the frontmost surface, and the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform vertically (the difference in strength is reduced). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It spreads and progresses to the outside.

  On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540 while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant. In other words, the player can visually recognize light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not directly beside the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115B. The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115B shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). Thereby, it can be made easy to make a player visually recognize light, and the production effect of a light emission effect can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. And a unit that is supported from below and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An electric decoration unit 401 disposed on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; Is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The illumination unit 401 is a unit in which a model name or the like is decorated on the front side surface, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. When the included LED emits light, an effect by light is performed.

  The electric decoration unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wave shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally long plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding in a tubular shape from the waved wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 and inside the tubular shape A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and fastened with screws inserted into the upper frame member 410. Is mainly provided.

  The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear plate-like members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is disposed on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body 402.

  The wavy wall 403 meshes with the wavy wall 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the electric decoration unit 401 to the upper frame member 410 This is a part that improves the performance.

  The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wave-like wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, a laterally long groove shape that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 vertically is formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 so as to be recessed.

  The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body portion 402 is disposed is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that encloses the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and the inner side access. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411 The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to the position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side. The lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R from the back side is regulated and constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033. Provided.

  The body member 411 is an elongated member on the left and right sides where openings for allowing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450 to pass are formed on both the left and right sides, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. Thus, on the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wave shape in a top view, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the electrical decoration unit 401, than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405 It mainly includes a support through hole 413 that is formed to penetrate in a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction in the upper right corner.

  The wavy wall 412 is formed in a wave shape substantially the same as the wavy wall 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401. Thereby, the position alignment of the left-right direction at the time of fitting the electrical decoration unit 401 in the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper side frame member 410 can be performed easily.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through-hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Accordingly, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, since the other end of the wiring whose one end is connected to the electronic substrate included in the electrical decoration unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

  The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning with respect to the upper frame member 410 of the electrical decoration unit 401.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position coinciding with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wave shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side on the lower right corner bottom surface, and a recessed groove from the back side on the lower left corner bottom surface. A supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed in a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end portion and can be screwed in, and a second screw that can be screwed in a position closer to the top and bottom. The fastening part 419b is mainly provided.

  The wavy side 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall 422 formed at the lower edge front side end). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (see FIG. 86). ), A load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electric decoration portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is comprised so that the load (weight etc.) given from can be provided to the electrical decoration part 8031. FIG.

  The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape to a position where it does not reach the tip portion from the base portion. The enlarged rib 419a is provided.

  As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, so that the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are connected to the main body frame 14a. (See FIG. 125A), details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with three identically shaped ribs at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screws to the fastening portion 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at a lower position of the main body member 411. Is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and having an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421 It is mainly provided with an opening portion 424 that is disposed at a position that is equidistant from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and that includes a plurality of small-diameter through holes that penetrate vertically.

  In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at a position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on each other, and the strength can be improved.

  In the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123), the opening 424 is an opening through which vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 are passed (released to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings that allow vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450 to pass therethrough.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally-long rectangular through hole 430R2 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light irradiated to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

  121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by an imaginary line for easy understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted through the connection holes 469, and left and right ends. The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having substantially symmetrical shapes, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451 that is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible sound wave and can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through-hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is provided. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and forms a space between the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Side assembly 480.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through-hole 466 of the front assembly 460 and emits a production sound related to the game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through-hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) and passes through the end of the speaker connection wire 453. The connector is configured to be connected to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) by being connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102).

  The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface portion is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. Can be reproduced and output with high sound quality. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 has a main body portion 461 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left and right direction and the back side is opened, and a plurality of concave portions that are recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center in the vertical width. And the extended plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 from the upper and lower width outside. A wiring passage recess 464 that is recessed from the rear side end of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 461, and A through hole 466 that is circularly inserted through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage-forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear side Screws inserted into the side assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to be coupled and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a lower end of the distal end side body portion 461T And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side.

  The main body portion 461 is divided into left and right directions as a region divided into a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left and right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M provided on the left side and a front end side main body portion 461T provided on the central side in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body portion 461M (left side in FIG. 121). Note that the base end side main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal end side main body 461T are continuously formed with spaces formed between the rear assembly 480 and the rear end assembly 480.

  The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that does not turn back on the inside (an edge portion on which no flange or the like is formed).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

  The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted through the through holes 463a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e. It passes through the through-hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a is screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. Pressed against the rear assembly 480. Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material sandwiched therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and a gap can be prevented from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess portion 464 is visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled, The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which light irradiated from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

  The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and is bent a plurality of times in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib which forms. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being generated on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a body portion 481 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left and right direction and is open on the front side, and is recessed in a semicircular shape from the top and bottom edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the top and bottom width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extending plate extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outside 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and a cup-like shape of the main body portion 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side, and through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 and the front-rear direction. Through holes 488 and front assembly In the corresponding position in the longitudinal direction a front recess 471 of the 60 to the side recess 491 after being recessed toward the front side to the rear side, mainly comprising a.

  The main body 481 extends in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 with respect to the outer shape of the back side plate. The front side wall part 481H formed from the shape fitted inside the inner side surface of the rear side wall part 461H of the rear side wall part 461H is provided.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer periphery thereof, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that an acoustic effect is reduced by the sound leakage from an outer peripheral position can be suppressed.

  The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary convex portions protruding from the front side of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right sides with an interval through which the speaker connection line 453 can pass. 481Ha is provided.

  The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage concave portion 464 from being displaced when the rear side assembly 480 is assembled to the front side assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered so as to extend to the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 extends from the wiring passage concave portion 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left and right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as that of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed part, Comprising: It utilizes for positioning between fastening part 14e1.

  The extending plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted through the through holes 483a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and pass through the through-holes 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450R extends from the back side of the main body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed with a width that fits in the wiring passage recessed part 464, and more than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recessed part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is projected with a projecting length that is slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

  That is, by passing the speaker connection line 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that an acoustic effect falls by the sound leakage from the opening for letting the speaker connection line 453 pass can be suppressed.

  The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which light irradiated from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and is in contact with each other without a gap between the front assembly 460 and a plurality of spaces in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is the rib which forms the bending channel | path (refer FIG. 123) which turns around. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage-forming rib 487 is designed with a dimension such that a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at the front end thereof in contact with the passage-forming rib 467. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressing force blocks the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

  At this time, if the left and right rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 is weak and may bend to the left and right, there is a possibility that the compression force does not work well and the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased in the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). The strength can be strengthened by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 is satisfactorily closed. Can do.

  The rear recessed portion 491 is formed in a shape that is reversed in the front-rear direction with the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

  123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. FIG. In FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b), for easy understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that face each other are opposed to each other. The figure is shown in a state where is expanded toward the front side of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 can be obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) vertically drawn at the center of the paper. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461B of the front side assembly 460. Is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic path as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the distal end side main body 461T. The acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately shifted up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e disposed at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment).

  By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and Further, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body part 461 and the back side wall part 461H, the rigidity of the main body part 461 is enhanced by each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can do.

  Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes in cooperation with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly. In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided by avoiding the passage formation rib 467. Will progress.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123A as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is generated on the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is disposed on the L side and is closest to the left-right direction is disposed on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

  On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side (for example, the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b)). When the rib portion 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrows L and D).

  Accordingly, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are alternately arranged up and down as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, The traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured longer than the left and right width of the space.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, and the generation of the stationary wave due to the vibration wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It is possible to proceed in the direction of arrows L and U.

  Accordingly, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage-forming rib 487 is formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that holds the wiring, and at a plurality of locations (mainly) in the vertical direction toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are provided at five locations).

  Since each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected with the main body part 481 and the front side wall part 481H, the rigidity of the main body part 481 is enhanced by each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can do.

  Here, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed in a shape that coincides with each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). In the front-back direction).

  In addition, since the effect | action of each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is similar to the effect | action of the rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are aligned vertically. In addition, the vertical width is expanded at a distance from the speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471,491. Thereby, an acoustic effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (voice) travels toward the distal end side main body 461T which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the front end side main body 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. The sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface portion of the speaker 451 has an opening and an opening 424 (an opening formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portions 471 and 491 ( 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without causing the sound to be heard. Can do.

  The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase thereof, so that the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front surface of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out with the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of a sense of reality, and can raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The inner space of 450 is used as an enclosure and discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 or setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is a path that avoids the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is defined. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (sound wave) can be obtained by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extending length in the vertical direction. ) Can be tuned.

  In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purpose. The speaker assembly 450 is reinforced by being disposed at a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed.

  For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are disposed in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by a load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

  In addition, the extended plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are disposed closer to the extending plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening part 468, the fastening part 419 inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other, so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

  Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned below in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. In a state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 are put on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450, from the fastening portion 14e1.

  Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. In this embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

  An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent attempt to illegally allow a wire, a piano wire, or the like to enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424. It can be easily suppressed.

  In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally entered into the game area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 has the front concave portion 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is closed by the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is made to enter the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the portion where the wire enters. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the wire, the piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

  In addition, the through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451. The distance between the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, which is a portion where the speaker assembly 450 enters the speaker assembly 450, can be increased.

  Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, and it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of fraudulent profits.

  124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (c). FIG. 124A is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A. is there. In FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding, whereas in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Is omitted.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered so as to incline toward the back side. The outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 is tapered so as to be inclined inward toward the rear side, and fitted into the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation | work which inserts the front side wall part 481H of the rear side assembly 480 in the back side wall part 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the compressive force acts from the rib part 487c toward the rib part 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib parts 467c, 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib parts.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M has a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M as compared with the front end side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. It is ensured greatly in a mode of bulging in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body 461T and discharged at a low speed. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to easily hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

  125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124B is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124A.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a front assembly 460, a rear assembly 480, and a screw that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a and fastened to the fastening portion 419. The upper side plate member 14e is a portion sandwiched between the main body frame 14a. In other words, the enlarged rib 419a is disposed at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, thereby preventing the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (by passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without contacting with the fastening portions 462 and 482). The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed without using the side assembly 480.

  The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together with the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is provided at the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  In addition, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). Thus, at the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is disposed inside).

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the counterpart speaker assemblies 450R and 450L. Thus, it is possible to reproduce the sound with high quality as a transparent sound without causing a conflict with the reproduced sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 and the upper side plate member 14e of the rear assembly 480 are brought into contact with each other on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A), while the speaker assembly 450 In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected to the front side in a portion disposed opposite to the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480. The projecting portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 does not have a configuration in which the speaker assembly 450 abuts (sticks) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e.

  In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin), but is not limited thereto. It is not what is done.

  For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. Alternatively, a concrete member may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the thickness can be increased.

  Moreover, it is desirable that it is a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Further, regarding the shape, it may be provided in a long plate shape, may be provided in a spike shape, or may be provided in a manner dotted in a rounded shape. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating state.

  The arrangement of the portion functioning as an insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surfaces of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

  For example, when arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a cylindrical shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. You may position by. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be dispensed with, and functions as the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator by tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member to be applied (the load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) or the connecting hole 469. The upper side of the through hole disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in the shape, or a screw inserted into the through-hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is disposed Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be tightened is fixed by being screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125B). As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, since the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450, by firmly fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted through the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

  The same relationship as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be applied to the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed is shown.

  First, in order to describe the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced apart from each other for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

  The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward from the right end portion of the rear end surface disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on the surface.

  The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a cup shape with an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be able to contact the back surface of the game board 13, and a central portion opened. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end portion disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a posture that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects to the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) on which the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a. Thereby, workability | operativity when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

  128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) show the board surface support device 600. 2 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 that has started to push the left end portion into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIG. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted.

  When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is placed. The part is slid between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid in a posture rotated around an axis directed in the vertical direction with respect to the inner frame 12, so that the left end front support on the near side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the part 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support part 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support part 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability | operativity can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the rear side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed opposite to the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game bottom board 13 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 ° as an angle larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game shop. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. The workability when the board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the post-inclination at the time of installing the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 that are arranged one above the other and are released later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It contacts the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 has the claw member 620 before rotation and the claw member 630 before regulation (parts disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to retreat from the route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the state of the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

  The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and the vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not contact the lower end portion of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board surface support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the panel surface support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum, so that the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13 according to the lever principle. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a less powerful operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b (see FIG. 126). 13 is a case where the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower panel support devices 600 is not fixed). However, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

  For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is caused by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Be regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. And a floating connector 13a supported by the game board 13 so that the position of the game board 13 can be changed in the direction of the surface of the game board 13 and a control board disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface support device 600. A receiving connector 12d to which wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) or the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture that inclines in a manner in which the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 includes a panel support device 600 that is disposed in the vicinity of the right corner of the inner frame 12 such that a pair of upper and lower sides face each other. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 having the same configuration are disposed facing each other, only one panel surface support device 600 will be described, and the description of the other panel surface support device 600 will be omitted.

  130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board support device 600 A release state in which the game board 13 is released is shown. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable to a frame member 610 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 that is inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A pre-rotation claw member 620 that is pivotally supported, and a pre-regulation claw member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620. 630 and a post-rotation claw member 640 that is arranged on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are opposed to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line through the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 at the upper front side of the support hole 612. An arc recess 614 that is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted into and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. It is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, mainly comprises.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-like member having an enlarged diameter at the proximal end side of the insertion, and after being inserted through the support hole 612, the end of the insertion distal end is pressed. , Fixed to the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

  Like the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed in a straight line so as to penetrate the plate part 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper front corner of the plate part 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed in a straight line in the back side of the plate portion 621a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Hole 624 mainly.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is simultaneously inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-restricting claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is opposed to the left and right, and is a longitudinally long portion 621a1, and an extending portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b From the back side extended plate 621c extending downwardly inclined by about 45 degrees and the back side end of the extended portion 621a2, it extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a. A hanging back plate 621d provided and a front extending plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate 621d to the front side with an inclination of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate 621d. And mainly.

  The drooping back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed to be at right angles to each other.

  The rear surface side extending plate 621c is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is brought into contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts to contact the main body plate portion 611.

  Thus, when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the operator side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

  The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front-side extending board 621e functions as a guide for inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back board part 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that separates the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

  The pre-restricting claw member 630 is a body plate portion 631 formed in a shape of a side view when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion, and a part of the body plate portion 631, which is opposed to the left and right And a pair of supported holes 632 that are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 631a and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connection plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a and is inclined from the lower end portion to the front side. And an inclined extending plate 633 that extends and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

  The inclined extending plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed to face the front frame 14 and is a portion that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby, a free posture change of the claw member 630 before restriction is restricted.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 has a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, and is opposed to the left and right. From the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported plate portions 641a and the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed so as to penetrate the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are supported by the third shaft member P63, from the rear side. An inclined extending plate 643 that is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a part that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  The inclined extending plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle that contacts the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)). It is formed.

  134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), it is fixed to the multifunctional cover member 171 and the panel surface support device 600 that are arranged close to the panel surface support device 600. The layout of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the claw member 640 after rotation rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 only by pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Accordingly, the claw member 640 after rotation can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

  Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with an urging force in a direction approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force is applied, the pre-restricting claw member 630 is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 is changed as the panel support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state. While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, the front side of the claw member 630 before regulation rises in a manner of separating from the drooping back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is in contact with the resistance portion 634a intersecting with a circle centering on the second shaft member P62 (see FIG. 134 (a)). 135 to (a)), the front-side end of the claw member 630 before regulation rises as the claw member 620 before rotation tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b that is a portion that is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 is disposed to face the restriction rod 615, When the restriction rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are not in contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is moved to the inclined extending plate 633 side. The front end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

  In the angle range (the range between FIG. 134A and FIG. 135A) in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and operates, the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630 Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 when operating by the downward load is changed in the posture opposite to the downward load (in the rising direction) Posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the downward load is restricted.

  In addition, the game board 13 is in contact with the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c, so that the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 as long as the game board 13 is not pushed into the back.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the nail | claw member 620 before rotation rotates by applying a downward load to the nail | claw member 630 before regulation. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied from the front frame 14 to the pre-restriction claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be prevented from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in contact with the inclined extending plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 when the panel surface support device 600 is released. The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length of the inclined extending plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

  In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side when the game board 13 abuts on the back side of the back side extension board 621c, the back side extension board is used. Rubbing friction occurs between 621 c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the panel surface support device 600, the front rotation claw member 620 is rotated by the load from the front frame 14. Depending on the manner in which the multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 are in contact with each other, the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. May occur.

  If the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in this state, the space between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 is assumed. This may shorten the distance of the game and hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the multifunction which is arrange | positioned by the front frame 14 by employ | adopting the structure which suppresses that the nail | claw member 620 before rotation rotates with the load from the front frame 14 (refer FIG. 89). When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it can be made to notice the store clerk who was performing the operation | work which closes the front frame 14 that the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 is not the fixed state.

  Recognizing this, the store clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-restriction claw Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively, The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 projects to a position where it can come into contact with the claw member 630 before regulation, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured such that the posture is not regulated by the regulation rod 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. No.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-restricting claw member 630 immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in a fixed state, the front side end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. Yes.

  As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk pushes the game board 13 slightly, the game board 13 is stabilized by 90%. In the case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the panel surface support device 600 is loaded from the multi-function cover member 171 disposed in the front frame 14. The board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is disposed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extending plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 134 (a )), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 back. That is, the game board 13 displaces the claw member 640 after rotation, and accordingly, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front face of the game board 13 and the face of the board back support plate portion 621d facing the game board 13 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, the game board 13 moves (tilts) while pushing down the drooping back plate 621d, so that the claw member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the game board 13 is given as a resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite to the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the arc, the non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side is increased accordingly.

  Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is moved from the portion that contacts the restriction rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion that contacts the restriction rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 is gradually increased is formed.

  Thereby, the inclined extending plate 633 is pushed to the back side by the multi-function cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the second shaft member P62 is displaced by rotating the claw member 620 before rotation. The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously close to the drooping back plate 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship that separates from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extending plate 633. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunction cover member 171 is moved to the pre-regulation claw member 630 or the inclined extending plate 633. Then, the board surface support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

  In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support apparatus 600. That is, in the state where the back side surface of the back side extended plate 621c is not in contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is connected to the multifunction cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 until the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board). The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extending plate 633 is pulled upward and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation bar 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation bar 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and continues to rotate as it is. By doing so, the board surface support apparatus 600 can be brought into a released state.

  Note that when the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the claw member 640 after rotation that is displaced (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. Thereby, when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the release state, the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side can be solved.

  In addition, the upper and lower panel support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth in accordance with the state change of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 that is operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member that support the game board 13 as compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

  Therefore, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 in the case of displacing the pre-regulation claw member 630 to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615). Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the locations supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the same effect also arises because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb before the rotation claw member 620. And the claw member 640 after rotation can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle.

  Accordingly, since the amount of displacement of the gaming board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, the gaming board at the place supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

  136, the released state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is moved from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). ) In FIG. 139, the rotated state is illustrated immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing regulating part 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In order to facilitate understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 viewed in cross section in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the panel surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is detached, but the front frame 14 is closed when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, so that the operation board back member 155 above the game board 13 and the opening / closing regulating unit 159 is interfered. Is avoided. Therefore, when the board surface support device 600 is fixed, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, the front frame 14 is disposed at the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extending plate 633 of the panel surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. Since the reaction force becomes excessive when the rotation direction of the pre-restricting claw member 630 (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) is reversed (FIG. 138 clockwise direction), This is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in a state where the game board 13 is disposed, there is a possibility that the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extending plate 621c may contact each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state just before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing regulating portion 159 The inclined extending plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

  Further, in this state, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. As described above, the direction (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the pre-restricting claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are not reversed and can be easily pushed in with a normal load. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be pushed in via the opening / closing restriction part 159, and the board surface support device 600 can be set in a fixed state. Therefore, it is allowed to close the front frame 14.

  140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member for closing the rear surfaces of the ball launch unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) shows a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b), only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-casting and a base member centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state in which the front surface of 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG. 23 (a)). And a ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 with a hook that elastically deforms. The base member 710 is disposed on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the launch solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the launch rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launch solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A plurality of fastening portions 716 that are cylindrically projected to the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straight from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. Mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning projections 719 are mainly provided.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-like portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 713 that is formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the convex portion 714 that protrudes to the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713 is disposed opposite the attracting force generation solenoid 741. And a defect determination convex portion 715 that is provided in a projecting manner.

  The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing flat surface 714a that is disposed to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is opposite to the facing flat surface 714a and that is inclined to the right as it goes to the back surface side. A surface 714b.

  When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the failure determination convex portion 715 is not in contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741 but is loosely fastened ( In the state of being lifted from the cover member 721), it is in contact with the cover member 721, and is formed with a convex height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launch unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing and fixing the suction force generation solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed in advance.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711, a restriction state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). And a switching device 740 that is controlled so as to change its state depending on an allowable state in which the flow down to the firing rail 730 is allowed.

  The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a bowl shape on the opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) pass at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 to the rod-shaped portion 722 side. A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship protruding slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724, And a shaft bar portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

  The switching device 740 is an adsorption force generation solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726, and the adsorption force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 whose posture changes depending on whether or not, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attracting force generation solenoid 741, and a ball A guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the guide arm member 742 and that is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and inclines downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and can accommodate the ball P8 upward from the base of the guide inclination portion 744. And a regulation projecting portion 745 that is extended by an appropriate distance and whose extending end projects toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

  The sphere passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144), and a falling plate portion 724a that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction; A rib portion 724b that is opposed to the upper side of the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and the extending tip end surface is inclined downward toward the back side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a A left inner side surface 724c that is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction is mainly provided. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and toward the right.

  In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), when the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 contacts the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are disposed while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged in a manner to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. A collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is disposed which is arranged with a space shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a that is formed as a long long hole along the direction and allows a fastening screw to pass therethrough, and is in a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a And a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened together with the fastening portion 716 is selected, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731. It can be slid along the straight line to be drawn, and thereby the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, it is possible to easily adjust the firing strength of the ball P <b> 81 (launch strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount). Since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be made unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, a rolling plate portion 730a formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extending obliquely upward to the left, The mounting plate portions 730b and 730c are suspended from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and a base is formed by screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, so that sound, vibration, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and comes into contact with two front and rear locations on the circumferential surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. Configured to guide.

  FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball sending state by the ball feeding device 720 in time series. In FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for easy understanding.

  In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a restricted state (a state where the supply of power to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guiding arm member 742 is descended by gravity). The restriction overhanging portion 745 is disposed at a position corresponding to the back-side open end of the ball passage opening 724, abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back-side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (power is supplied to the attracting force generation solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restriction overhanging portion 745 is changed. Retreats above the sphere and the flow restriction of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows into the upper portion of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P <b> 8 is in contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, so that the further flow is restricted, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thereby, the sphere P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the firing rail 730.

  Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), so that the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 is also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is controlled. Accordingly, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721. The cutting metal member 725 includes a through hole 725a through which a screw that is screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. The lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower blade portion 725b has a sharp cut at the tip, and the same plate as the base end side plate of the lower blade portion 725b And an upper blade portion 725c extending from the main body.

  The upper blade part 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side with respect to the lower blade part 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate part 724a. In addition, the lower side of the upper blade part 725c is inclined downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade part 725b is inclined upward as it goes toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in front view.

  The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the sphere. Next, with reference to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and enters the ball P8 will be described.

  146 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the launch of the ball P8. In FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, illustration of some components of the ball launch unit 112 a is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the firing rail 730 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). In this state, a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, and the plunger 702 projects vigorously, whereby a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

  Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved and the yarn Y8 is pulled while the ball P8 is placed in the game area. An illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening by loosening is known.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the sphere P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is disposed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 that rolls on the firing rail 730 through the lower side of the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 is in the middle of the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade part 725c protruding above the flow-down plate part 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c. .

  When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the yarn Y8, a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that the yarn Y8 is applied to the yarn Y8. A large tensile force is applied. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening can be prevented.

  If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 will not be cut because sufficient tension is not applied to the yarn Y8. In this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The configuration is substantially the same.

  An effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing / retreating operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100, and the like.

  The advancing / retreating operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing / retreating operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, And a petal motion device 800 is connected to one end of the petal motion device 800 and the other end of the design display device 81. The drive-side arm member 910 that is pivoted by the driving force of the drive motor 921 being transmitted through the arm gear 924 and the end portion of which is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100, and the drive-side arm member 910 are driven. A drive motor 921 that generates a drive force, and a transmission means 920 that includes a plurality of gears that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive-side arm member 910; A thin plate-like slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction in conjunction with the turning operation of the drive side arm member 910, and a thin plate-like second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, In addition, on the opposite side of the drive side arm member 910, a long plate-like driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800 is mainly provided.

  Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden in other members and does not appear in the figure. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-like portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position to the right of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 moves forward through a small gap formed in the support base material 801. The first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is drilled at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central body portion of the support base 801. The opening 801P is disposed on the right side of the opening 801P and extends rearward into a pair of cylinders. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and having a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a detection arc plate 880d of a loose fitting device 880 described later can pass. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

  A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically long, roughly oval area in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes the region below the upper portion.

  In the present embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that extends a little longer in the vertical direction as a whole, but the petal motion device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as will be described later. It is possible to reduce the operation space when 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction, rather than in a shape that is long in the left and right direction.

  At this time, since the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked and linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G that are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later, The outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be disposed at any position as long as they do not interfere with each other. However, in the present embodiment, the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G respectively. It arrange | positions at the right side (refer FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, collecting the weight in the right half of the petal motion device 800 supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front side prevents the left half on the opposite side from drooping downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the support base 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801 from being opened. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base material 801 is not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, constituting the flower of the hibiscus as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back side.

  FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape extending in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  On the surface of the petal 802, irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed, and the periphery also has an irregular shape in front view. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape and have slightly different irregularities, but are roughly formed in the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is not particularly formed with a boundary between the inner region and the specific color (red) is darkened. Coloring is done.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802 </ b> S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having a screw hole inside at two locations, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and the central portion in the radial direction. Yes.

  The petal 802 has a rear side portion 802a that is located closer to the flat plate member 803 than a rear side portion 802a that is disposed on the rounded front end side (counterclockwise in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)). The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharpened tip side (clockwise in front view, left side of FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is disposed closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

  The front side portion 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side portion 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (size difference) in the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made significant.

  The five petals 802 have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has a shape in which an outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

  Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screwed portions 803S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having screw holes inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated in the short direction of the member 803.

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be substantially surface positions on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a that are perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extend rearwardly from the rear side of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extend to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes inside at two locations corresponding to the screwed portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

  A screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front side, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a front shape in which the same five shape portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both the front and rear directions.

  Returning to FIG. The rear peripheral wall 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, respectively, in two places adjacent to each other in five places that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and one in the middle of the three places excluding the two places. A screw-in portion 813S having a screw hole inside is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 813a is extended from the tip edge of the above-mentioned five locations where the screw-in portion 813S is not formed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One purpose of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to linearly extend outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 has an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (about 15 ° in the pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  Both side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend in parallel with a slight gap.

  In this way, a set of three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 on both sides thereof is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). In addition, each edge part of the center slit 814 and the both-side slit 815 may be formed in the front view round shape (semicircle shape), and may be formed in the rectangular shape.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the both-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits are both-side slits. In the extending direction of 815, the shape is a little rectangular (a rectangular cut is formed). This rectangular extension part (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815. Is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  Thereby, the circular plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other so as to face inward, and this also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that five sets of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, when arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be more densely laid out. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin-made member having a long plate-like front shape. The slide member 820 has a small thickness at both end portions of the slide member 820, and the tip portion has a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. An extended portion to be molded, a central portion that is larger than the effect portion at a position between the extended portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extended portion, and the center of the slide member 820 A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side to the center slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner of protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side, Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect at right angles. And it arrange | positions so that it may extend over the both-side slits 815.

  On the other hand, the threaded portion 803 </ b> S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion hole 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into and fixed to the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803.

  Thereby, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. Inserted without gaps.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 does not rotate around the guide pin 822 and the body posture faces a certain outward direction. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. FIG. In FIG. 161 (a), the fourth gear 880G is not shown. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side in the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot support opening 831 at the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 that extends forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall on the front surface side.

  The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends in a shape of an elongated loop in front view along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830. The rotating plate 830 is integrally formed.

  The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot support opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to drop.

  The guide rail 832 extends from the position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 to the clockwise direction in the front view along the direction substantially in the middle between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. Further, it extends to a position in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while curving in an arc shape toward the clockwise direction of the front view from the middle direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion projects from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 to the front side.

  Four other guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot support opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and the five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from each other. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

  On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot support opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so as to externally fit the pivot opening 831 to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 in the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. As a result, the pivot support opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is disposed and fixed on the rear side of the second gear 830G. The oil damper 805 is disposed so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G.

  A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G. Around the pivot opening 810a, there are three places on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). Screw insertion holes 810b are formed at positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 813S, and positioning holes 810c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned relative to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked and linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off and the rotating plate 830 Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154) and a loosely fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

  162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of a cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are a front screw portion 857 having screw holes inside at two positions on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and the lumen portion 856 side from the front screw portion 857. A holding portion 858 that is drilled toward the back surface in a shape having a counterbore at a position shifted to the back, and two support protrusions 859 that extend in a columnar shape slightly forward are formed integrally with each other. . The front-side front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base portion of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  The inner circumferential surface of the lumen portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing positions, and extends further to the rear than the rear side end of the shaft portion 852. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED board 861 is disposed on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  The LED board 861 is formed with a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851.

  By positioning the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 by inserting it into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  The LED board 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 so that the screwed portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 can be fitted therein.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED board 861 has a central location and a number of locations arranged on the concentric circles extending in multiples (double) around the one location at an equal interval. The LEDs 865 are respectively arranged and fixed, and emit light toward the front.

  In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861, lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. It is supposed to be. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

  A central decorative member 868 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is formed of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, and extends in a columnar shape from the long plate-like base to the back side, and can be screwed into the central portion. A pair of screw-in portions 869 are formed in which screw holes are formed.

  The screwing portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. A threaded portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 across the LED substrate 861 from the front side, and a screw is threaded into the threaded portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retaining member for the LED board 861.

  The loose-fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter A main body cylindrical member 883 that is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and is loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, and having a screw hole in the inside, at one of two locations out of four at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a is extended from the tip edge of the place where the screw-in part 883S is not formed among the four places described above.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is protruded in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a protruding length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, and in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b is formed extending over.

  The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED substrate 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are externally attached. A back cover 886 that is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with a bottom that rises to the front side of the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, and comes into contact with the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side to be fastened and fixed. Are disposed.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on the front and back surfaces (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surface is mirror-like. Therefore, for example, a light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 disposed on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

  The decoration member 884 is a member that produces a light emission effect by irradiating light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED substrate 861. The decoration member 884 forms a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed from a resin material having a property, and a back side plate portion formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, forming a disk shape with a peripheral wall rising to the back side on the back side. And an opening 885 is formed in the central portion so that the central decorative member 868 can be inserted.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is disposed and fixed concentrically. It is engaged with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

  In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshed with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the reverse direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and a screw insertion hole is formed around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotation device 850, and is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by being inserted into the positioning hole 880c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and being slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

  The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the back side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plate 880d has five identically-shaped plates arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  The detection circular plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and is a photo arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. In other words, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the arcuate plate 880d for detection can be detected (minimum angle) regardless of the posture at which the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate. 72 ° detection can be performed, and a rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

  The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw-in part 853 protruding rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and screwing it.

  At this time, a wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

  With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base member 801, and the slit member 810 is fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 as shown in FIG. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is attached to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  At this time, since the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is swelled locally by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b at eight locations along the circumferential direction, the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 813 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of 813 instead of planarly, and as a result, the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is It is pivoted smoothly and freely.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) when a load in the vertical direction is applied from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 are referred to as appropriate.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the innermost deep part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13. A support column 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the left and right central positions A rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the support pillar 1110, and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the opposite side of the support pillar 1110 across the rail fixing portion 1130; Is mainly provided.

  The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that pivotally supports the drive side arm member 910 and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right sides in the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front side end portion thereof, so that screws can be screwed in. And a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in a pair of upper and lower sides on the same surface as the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-like main body member bent in a U shape when viewed from the back, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and is also a support column. A rotation shaft hole 911 that is pivotally supported by 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 that protrudes in a stepped columnar shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member, and a long A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the long body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long body member. And a support portion 914.

  The drive-side arm member 910 includes a rotation of an arm gear 924 that includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that projects radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, the support column 1110 is rotated about the axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion that accommodates the gear of the transmission means 920, and is configured by three circular concave portions that are continuously provided while slightly intersecting. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. The first housing portion 1121, the second housing portion 1122 connected to the first housing portion 1121, and the drive-side arm member disposed opposite to the first housing portion 1121 across the second housing portion 1122 And a third housing portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 to be fitted to 910 is housed.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked in front and back and supported so as to be slidable up and down. And a positioning boss 1132 that fits the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Arranged on the line. The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

  The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° in a front view. An extending wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by the support long hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

  The supported convex portion 951 is loosely fitted with a cylindrical collar, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported on the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support long hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending in the up-down direction provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. Then, it is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

  The base end side long hole 932 is extended vertically downward from a lower end of the stopping portion 932a, and a stopping portion 932a formed along a trajectory in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 at the upper end portion. The displacement part 932b is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150 having a fastening plate portion 1001S which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; and a slide plate 930 The supporting projections 1002S are provided in a cylindrical shape toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported long holes 931, and are formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner when viewed from the front. In addition, a shaft support hole 1003S for rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, a circular arc recess 1004S formed in a circular arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S are also provided. And the same center A convex portion 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the circular arc shape, mainly comprises.

  The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S and the supported long hole 931. In this state, the slide plate 930 is configured so as to be slidably supported by being screwed in from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The protrusion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a convex height that can be abutted when displaced from the regular position or bent. Is done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body portion that is formed with a lower end portion that is divided into two forks and an upper end portion that is formed in a circle centered on the pivoted column portion 941. A supported column portion 941 that is provided in a cylindrical shape and is supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary projection that is disposed close to the supported column portion 941 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. Part 942 is mainly provided.

  The supported column 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. An insertion portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The threaded portion 941a in a state where a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is disposed at the tip end with the shaft support column portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween. When the screw is screwed into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the 2nd production member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular and resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing the auxiliary convex portion 942 from coming out of the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the 2nd production member 940 seems to bend, the auxiliary | assistant convex part 942 contact | abuts to the circular arc recessed part 1004S, and it can suppress a bending deformation by producing resistance.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 has three screwed portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed when a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened, and an outer diameter direction within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924. A detection sensor 1162 for detecting the flange 926 overhanging the shaft, a shaft column 1163 on which a collar for guiding the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 is rotatably supported, and a support slot A cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of 1140, a wiring stopper 1165 disposed close to the cover support portion 1164 and concealed from the substrate cover 1000C in front view; And a screwing portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is disposed in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 from the front is missing, the screwing portion 1006S 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

  In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100 that are stacked and fixed to each other and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Thereby, even when the heavy apparatus such as the petal operation apparatus 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S can be easily suppressed. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 to FIG. 173, description will be given of the ascending / descending operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171 and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

  168 and 169 show a state in which the drive side arm member 910 is disposed on the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is disposed at the connecting position of the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal end side long hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving side arm member 910 is disposed on the lower end side of the moving range. The state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in the state where the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission long hole 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is the inner fitting convex part 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of the circle around the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and a range in which the drive side arm member 910 maintains the posture (a range in which the drive motor 921 rotates idly) is generated, so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

  In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  From FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, in the range of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked so that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized. Can be made.

  Here, when the second effect member 940 moves in a manner of projecting toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 operates as if following the petal motion device 800. Can be visually recognized.

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered and moved to the lowest position as shown in FIG. 172, the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 is expanded from the initial position shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. Through the intermediate position, an expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and further a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position. (Operation) and return to the initial position (concentration position).

  In the initial position (concentration position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the circular opening 811 side). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is located. It is in the concentrated state that makes up the flower.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (concentrated position) as described above, if the first gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G, the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back as indicated by an arrow A10.

  At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot support opening 831 with a small frictional resistance, the rotation plate 830 can easily surround the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. On the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is interposed via the third gear 810G. Since braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the above-described rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque that is small enough to cause the rotating plate 830 to move initially.

  Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, only the rotating plate 830 is first rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotary plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11 as shown in FIG. Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 linearly extends from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. Move as guided by.

  At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and accordingly With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves linearly outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

  Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation that radially expands outward from the gathering position. In this widening operation, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward. On the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Get faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 830 is driven by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

  Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow. Further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Any decrease is even more pronounced.

  At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After this, it extends outwardly while curving in an arc shape in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front direction D15, and extends outwardly with five guide rails 832 so as to spiral outward as a whole. .

  As the guide rail 832 is inclined in the clockwise direction in front view as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Further, as the guide rail 832 is arcuately curved in the clockwise direction from the front direction D15, both the load on the slide pin 823 and the movement speed are more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the above-described central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by being inclined in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curved in an arc.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while reducing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 at the expense.

  On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little possibility of deviation. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured.

  In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the power transmission, while increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 with the central slit 814. The role is divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and is in a fully open state, and the expansion operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the positions are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is disposed on the surface. Thereby, compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 are integrally viewed like a hibiscus flower that is slightly larger (see FIG. 178 (b)).

  When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814 and cannot move further beyond this, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814 thereafter. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot further rotate in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the expanding operation can be maintained.

  When the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as indicated by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

  At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expansion operation, the expansion operation immediately continues so that the rotation operation is not interrupted. Can be migrated.

  When the petal 802 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the fully opened state as indicated by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the rotation operation is finished and the first motor 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the back as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is moved. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, only the rotating plate 830 is first rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b). Are assembled in the opposite direction.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. As a result, they are gathered and returned to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to return to the gathering state, and the gathering operation is completed.

  After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800. However, the central motor 804 is continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first motor 804G is rotated again in the clockwise direction as viewed from the back as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b) with the central motor 804, the petal 802 becomes as shown by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state.

  When the petal 802 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view in the concentrated state as indicated by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the front view) as indicated by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made faster than the actual rotation speed.

  From this concentrating operation to the rotating operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the operation may be stopped once and then transferred, or may be transferred immediately so as to be continuous. It can also be.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the ninth embodiment is described. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. A difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launch unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage formation unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 having a thin plate shape in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent to the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the depth of the recessed portion is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper stopper convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back side, and the upward direction generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Configured to withstand loads.

  This thin blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8 to illegally manipulate the ball inside the game area and to obtain illegal profits. This is arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible frauds will be described.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere by utilizing the launching moment of the ball. When the firing momentum is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. A ball could be fired without it.

  On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 through the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball directly enters the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, when considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side (the firing solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725. Therefore, even if the ball P9 is driven out vigorously, Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is struck out vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, a person who performs an illegal act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) or the like can be repeated, and illegal profits can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when an illegal act is performed using the yarn Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, the thin blades are inserted into the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  That is, when a person who performs an illegal act pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 is rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153, so that the yarn Y8 is damaged, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the yarn Y8 is brought closer when the yarn Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the yarn Y8 is pulled, the yarn Y8 can be disposed inside the notch 9145b, and the yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

  Further, as described above, the thin blade portion 9153 abuts on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance to an upward load. Thereby, when the yarn Y8 is pulled, the thin blade portion 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when the thin blade portion 9153 is given a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin blade portion 9153. Thereby, since it can prevent that the thin blade part 9153 collides with the ball | bowl P8 and it breaks, it can improve the durability of the thin blade part 9153.

  Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is disposed below the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who performs the cheating is afraid of detecting the cheating, after gripping the ball P8, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of a pants) in order to prevent the store clerk from being suspicious. ), And it is easy to perform an illegal act of pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state in which the yarn Y8 extends to the player side through the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is stretched through a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  When the award ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and jumps around the ball guide opening. 53, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on the yarn Y8 arranged on the front side of 53 and hitting the yarn Y8. Flows down through. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the rising limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower dish It is possible to increase the possibility that the ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Third, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a that is inclined downward toward the right is formed. The right inclined surface 9142a can easily give a rightward speed to the sphere discharged from the sphere guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

  Thereby, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component in the right direction (facing the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) in the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the climbing restriction step portion is located at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It connects with the left end part (left end side) of the lower bottom part near the exit of the spherical channel | path part 9145, and it is comprised as a plane part extended in a perpendicular direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed above the ride restriction step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion are formed by the space V9. 9145 communicates. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 before flowing through the sphere guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the sphere can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

  In addition, the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and contacts the climbing restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the climbing restriction step 9053a allows the passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (the direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (the direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

  FIG. 184 to FIG. 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. In FIG. 184, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper right is illustrated, and in FIG. 185, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper left is illustrated, and in FIG. 186, the passage formation unit 10140 is illustrated at the left. A state viewed from obliquely below is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. And the sheet-metal member 10150 is provided with the thin plate-shaped thin-plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 extended to the front side in the aspect which covers the downward direction of the notch 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the recess depth is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The In addition, the notch 10145c includes a through hole formed in the front and rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape in a front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex part 14d2 which protrudes toward the back side from the side surface of the back side is provided. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), and thereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere flowing down the foul sphere passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped by colliding with the sphere P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving part 146 (to the right). Accordingly, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it approaches the passage portion 145a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily put into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 which is a gap in which the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is the first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 is a portion that constitutes a forked blade portion, and extends to the left in such a manner that it slightly tilts upward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angle concave portion 10155 having a deep concave portion is formed between the first thin-plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin-plate blade portion 10154.

  The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute angle recess 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angle concave portion 10155, and the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged.

  The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the yarn Y8 pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who performs an illegal act. Can easily enter the deep portion of the acute-angle recess 10155.

  A plate-like portion provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut against the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged facing the left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 is bent in the left and right reverse direction. The That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

  For example, a person who commits cheating tries to avoid the detection of cheating by releasing the ball P8 that has come out, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right reverse direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the backflowing sphere P8 is caught by the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stopped.

  As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time for the thread Y8 to be exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of the fraud can be accelerated.

  Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or tri-mochi) may be disposed in the deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 so as to adhere to the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even when the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that came to the person who performs the fraud is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member disposed in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is played in the game area. Since the thread Y8 is not discharged and is maintained on the spot, the unauthorized detection using the thread Y8 can be accelerated.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch intensity is weak and has not reached the game area is discharged to the lower dish 50. However, the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses a foul ball. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. The guide member formed to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship in which the sphere has a gap V11 that allows the sphere to flow between the tip member 2062a that is formed and disposed in proximity to the ball launch unit 112a. 2062b.

  A foul ball passage 2062c communicated with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball preventing member 68 is disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c.

  In the present embodiment, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. Formation is omitted. That is, a ball paid out from a payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main body side upper plate passage portion 161. When the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device The payout of the ball from 133 is configured to stop.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, as described above, when a sphere is adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one of the balls passes through the foul ball path 2062c, the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the paying ball against the yarn Y8 can be caused regardless of the accumulation state of the balls of the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut early.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball path 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is referred to as appropriate.

  The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilted gate member 68a is disposed on the near side.

  Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back side to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance. The long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole. In this state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. As a result, the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  The closing plate 2062b4 is formed such that the upper surface and the left surface that are in contact with the guide member 2062b have the same shape as the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The gradient increasing portion 2062d is a gradient that descends toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending to the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, And about 1/3 lower than the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when a ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball moves the gap V11 to the left and right. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

  A front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 between the closing plate 2062b4 and a width (approximately 2 [mm] in this embodiment) that is less than the diameter of the sphere and into which the thread can enter. It is recessed to the back side to a certain position. The place where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the front side of the side surface 2062d1 and on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

  Thus, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in the front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, It is possible to cause the yarn Y8 to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends of the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, from the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notches 2062b1 when receiving a load pulled at both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In this state, the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that rubbing occurs with the long screw B11 and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cut 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the ball to be fired contacts the outer rail 2062 (the vertical lower part of the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the ball to be fired. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

  In addition, a person who performs an illegal act through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes to the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 18), the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted, so that the yarn Y8 approaches the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cuts 2062c closer to the front side, the yarn Y8 can easily enter the cuts 2062c than when the cuts 2062c are arranged closer to the rear side.

  In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button type switch SW11 having a detection portion protruding downward is disposed. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is disposed so as to be able to be switched on and off when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

  190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the weight 68a2 side of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball path 2062c with the weight of the weight 68a2, and in FIG. 190 (b), The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used for fraud is illustrated for reference and the button type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is illustrated. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing sphere, and gives a resistance enough to hold the sphere passing through the foul sphere passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul sphere passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored until the next time when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, 0.6 seconds later). Because it can.

  On the other hand, the return ball preventing member 68 is a great resistance against an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage like an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball through the foul ball passage 2062c to reach the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) to be planted on the game board 13, holding a ball and placing it in a winning opening, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emitting a laser from the leading end It is possible to cheat (cut the nail).

  FIG. 191 is a partially enlarged front view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outline of an apparatus such as an endoscope that illegally enters is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the sphere, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is moved forward. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is rejected by the distal end portion of the endoscope) is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 190A, the state is connected to the distal end portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and is maintained in a state where the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to eliminate the opening / closing portion 68a1, and the distal end portion of the endoscope can be prevented from proceeding further.

  Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, control is performed so as to sound an alarm. , Can detect fraud early.

  Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in an OFF state, control may be performed so that the ball payout from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. (See FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the dispensing of the ball from the dispensing device 133 stops can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state where the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

  Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is not necessarily the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, when the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, the early stage Can be exchanged. Thereby, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraud before the replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage location can be saved. The effect that can be produced. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided).

  Whether the return ball prevention member 68 breaks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of breakage of the return ball prevention member 68. If the person who commits fraud does not know whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage may not be maintained, so that the deterrence of fraud can still be maintained. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully open position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is comprised by the aspect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose-fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose-fitting device 2880 includes a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, And a restricting portion 2888 that protrudes from the extended front end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. The loose-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose-fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose-fitting device 880. .

  The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 can protrude from the front side portion 802b to a position where it can not come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, a case where a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are arranged will be described. However, they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, operations of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. . In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal motion apparatus 2800 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG. This state is shown in the figure.

  Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in section for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in section in the same section. Moreover, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is outlined (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwed portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are formed on the surfaces facing each other on the other side screwed portions with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed with an inclination of about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The effect | action which the control part 2888 gives to the petal 802 is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is disposed outward in the radial direction along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the restricting portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 abut, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

  When the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. The petal 802 undergoes a posture change as much as possible.

  Thus, while the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 change their postures, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  In other words, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide rib 803a in contact with the both-side slits 815, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed, and the slide member 2820 has slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

  In contrast, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the slits 815 on both sides of the slide rib 803a on the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T on the inner inner wall. (Pushing) increases the frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in the frictional resistance becomes significant. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Accordingly, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the resistance to movement of the slide member 2820 in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a size between the movement resistance of the sliding member 2820 in the inclined posture).

  In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by shaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started from the state shown in FIG. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 is separated from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at a position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during the expansion is maintained. In this state, the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. FIG. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 illustrate the movement of the petal 802 from the expanding position to the concentration position in time series.

  In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become normal postures. Returned.

  Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 is stopped, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the petal 802 can be automatically rotated at the position where the petal 802 is being expanded and then returned to the concentration position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at a position where it abuts on the restriction portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). Therefore, the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and can be rotated at the fully open position.

  Further, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the position of the petal 802 is slightly changed even if it is in contact with the petal 802 that rotates in the fully open position or in a position that does not contact the petal 802 in the concentrated position or the fully open position. By setting the position where the restricting portion 2888 can pass through and can receive the load, the restricting portion 2888 can be prevented from obstructing the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it is a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a distant position. The difference in distance can cause a difference in whether the petal 802 expands to the maximum and performs a rotation operation, or performs a rotation operation with the expansion to the middle.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect with different jackpot expectations depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petal 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the restriction part 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

  The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  It may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the big hit expectation) that the petal 802 is in contact with the restriction portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture in the fully open position. In this case, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or rotating while causing a slight change in posture in contact with the restricting portion 2888, the meaning content transmitted to the player can be changed. .

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position. However, if the position where the petal 802 comes closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the position of the petal 802 is changed. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the posture of the petal 802 is changed can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position has been described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 in the time series when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a). Moreover, in FIG. 198 (a), FIG. 198 (b), FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together with the resistance exceeding the resistance, the description is omitted here.

  In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section in the same cross section.

  Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted into the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

  That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened to the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a and the both side slits 815 arranged on the front side clockwise direction of the central slit 814, both side slits 815 are provided on the wall portion on the front side clockwise direction. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in a manner that widens the width in the short-side direction, and the both-side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Among them, the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width of the slit 815 in the short direction.

  The clockwise concave portion 3815a is disposed to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a continues from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side of FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Formed.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed continuously.

  The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth deeper than that of the clockwise concave portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the central concave portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the rotating plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved downward in FIG. 198 (a) (the right end slide rib 803a is clockwise). It moves in the direction of entering the rotation side recessed portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

  Accordingly, the contact between the wall portion of the both-side slit 815 on the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). Rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the first contact point with 3810 as a fulcrum (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)).

  Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b have a deeper depth than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during the rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above is used. Contact with the central recessed portion 3814a and contact between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b are avoided.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a concave depth so that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not contact the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A rotation-side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . Thereby, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal, When the slide rib 803a on the center side in the radial direction accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side contacts the wall portion of the both-side slit 815, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a moves more counterclockwise than the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)), the rotary plate 830 is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the slide member 2820 and The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the radial center.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The rotation plate 830 can be independently rotated to switch the case where the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

  Thereby, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform operations that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 194 (b) )), And rotating the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (rotating with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Rotation operation) (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 ( a)), the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotating operation (rotating operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is returned. Can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are obtained. From the position of the petal 802 to be fastened and fixed, the movement of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 toward the gathering position can be started. As a result, after the plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 198 (a)) during the expansion (see FIG. 195), the concentrated position Since the arrangement of the petals 802 when performing the concentration operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment is configured such that the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through-holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate through the wall 8326. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 as the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is different from the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments in that the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not described. In addition, the other configurations are almost explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the rest of the configuration will be described with some supplementary explanation.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion that is disposed to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is drilled in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. In the left and right sides of the first through-hole 8326a and the vibration device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined with a horizontally-long rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310. A pair of second through-holes 8326b that are drilled along the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third holes that are drilled in a cross-sectional shape of a vertically long rectangle in front view at the left and right corners. And a through hole 8326c.

  Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has a purpose of facilitating passage of the liquid such as the above-described drinking water and a purpose of facilitating removal of coin-like foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. Is a through-hole. The coin-shaped foreign object is, for example, for a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is an obstacle to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless by an interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be inserted into gaps V13 and V14 between the members 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, a slight gap V13, V14 is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing this, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate about the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) disposed at the rear side end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Therefore, as the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction is longer, the position of the tilting device 310 is more easily displaced (deformed) to the left and right near the front end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misregistration using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, or misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation) is included.

  Therefore, it is a case where it is designed so that the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 does not become a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-like foreign object (for example, 1 yen coin) during normal use. In addition, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right sides (for example, the left side), the gap V13 that can be formed on the other side (for example, the right side) is the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. A gap V13 having a size obtained by adding up the gap V13 formed between the two and the like can be large enough to insert a coin-like foreign matter.

  That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 during normal use and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-like foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right, a coin-like foreign object can be inserted.

  In addition, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also generated in the tilting device 310 by using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. If the position is shifted (deformed) by applying a load toward the back side, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-like foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts in a state where a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left-right gap V13 or the front-rear gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that a foreign object enters the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted in the left and right sides toward the center in the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, a portion in which the coin-like foreign matter fitted into the gap V13 projects outward from the constriction of the case body 311 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)). A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, and it becomes easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated in a state where coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem occurs in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if a coin-like foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the operation device 8300 cannot perform the intended effect, and the coin-like foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. When it is detected, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, in a state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-like foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-like foreign matters through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. FIG. 203D is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a view in FIG. 203A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device 8300 in a CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through-hole 8326a has a horizontal center that is the same as the horizontal center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width that is greater than the horizontal width of the vibration device 5400 (refer to the first housing portion 5431 of FIG. 58). The Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center of the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is disposed below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. For this reason, when a coin-like foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right as viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) An inclination D81 that is downwardly inclined toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved toward the front, and an inclination D82 that is downwardly inclined toward the front side due to the tilting device 310 being tilted, As shown in FIG. 201, coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a.

  Accordingly, the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the minimum necessary while easily removing the coin-like foreign matter, so that the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured as compared to the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-like foreign material in the upper part of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 connected to the left and right and upper and lower sides of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (a member subjected to mirror finishing). The light passing through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

  With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state using the first through-hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visible to the player. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light by the first through-hole 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be viewed brightly.

  When the coin-shaped foreign matter is disposed at a position that partially closes the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than the case where there is no foreign matter (coin-like foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-like foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 using the light amount or the shadow of the coin-like foreign matter as a clue, so the coin-like foreign matter is not noticed. The possibility of continuing to remain in the member 8320 can be reduced. This effect is not limited to the case of being visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same as that of being visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole that can discharge a coin-like foreign material that falls on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the right and left width of the second through-hole 8326 is about 30 [mm] and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500-yen coin). The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through-hole 8326b is disposed near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-like foreign object has fallen downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Coin-like foreign matter can be removed.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water that flows along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used to discharge outwardly before.

  The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and the coin-like foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310, It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

  That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed so as to be able to discharge coin-like foreign matter as viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. In the present embodiment, The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c only by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body bending portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and a hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the up-down direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the work time can be kept short.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to easily remove the coin-like foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300.

  The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened to the right outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203B). Including the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even if a coin-like foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353 after removing the screws that fasten the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-like foreign object is sandwiched can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

  Thereby, even if the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because normal operation | movement is not performed and the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because a coin-like foreign material enters into the operation device 8300, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described. However, the board surface support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arrange | positioned in the aspect which receives the load from the front frame 14 via the front-back displacement member 2652 arrange | positioned so that contact | abutting is possible. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 204A shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204B, the front frame 14 has the inner frame 12. Is shown closed. In FIG. 204A, the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204B, the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is disposed so that the front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be displaced vertically. A longitudinal displacement member 2652 that is disposed so as to be able to contact the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and a longitudinal displacement A portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from the upper and lower sides so as to be displaceable at two positions in the front and rear, is in contact with a support portion 2654 that is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. And an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward the rim.

  The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it contacts the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is slightly spaced from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. Is set.

  The front / rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. And a rear position (see FIG. 204B).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a which is inclined downward toward the distal end side is formed at the rear distal end portion of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position to a vertical downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. It is an inclined surface connected continuously.

  The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is at a lower position at a front position of the front / rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is at an upper position at a rear position of the front / rear displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 from the back side by the claw member 640 after rotation can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate part 621d before the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the game board 13 to the drooping back plate part 621d.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, and therefore, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient is employed for the torsion spring NBb than the spring employed in the eighth embodiment. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operator's degree of freedom of selection and workability.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, against the injustice in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and enters the inside as it is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are wound above the reverse cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. In the fifteenth embodiment, the fraud detection device 2280 is detected when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire. While detecting the heat | fever, it is comprised so that the burnout of harness HN1-HN3 may be prevented.

  205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. 205B illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205C illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to a tensile shape (stored shape) by application of heat. Is done. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross-section at the front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  Fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and is overlapped on top of reverse cup portion 2178, and the back side so as to cover the back side opening of body box portion 2281. A back cover member 2282 attached to the main body box, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, extends to contact the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening upward from the lower corner portion. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. A first conductive portion 2286 that has one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and a right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess that is recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conduction portion 2286. Touchable The second conductive portion 2287 formed in the above-described manner, the torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 are supported by the protruding portion 2285. And a shape memory spring 2288 disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are connected to a portion projecting outside the main body box portion 2281 by one end of separate wirings by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 is released from the state where the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 are brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 205B) (FIG. 205 ( c), the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

  When an error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a loud volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Thus, it is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game.

  Details of fraud detector 2280 will be described. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper sides of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, compared with the eighth embodiment, the place where the wall portion 2178a is formed is shifted to the left, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the reverse cup portion 2178. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains on the long cover 173 as it is. It is possible to prevent penetration.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. Guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a characteristic of returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) approximately equal to the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178, and a tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conduction portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion. The connection with 2287 is released and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

  An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted through a guide long hole 2282a formed in the longitudinal direction of the back cover member 2282 in the front-rear direction, and on the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator pushes the extending portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraud is detected, it can be used repeatedly for early detection of the fraud.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, even when the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, by forming the light guide member 540 in a curved manner, a difference is caused in the traveling direction of the light emitted to both surfaces. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically, and FIG. 206 (d) is a guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206E is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, and FIG. 206E is an upward concave portion 254 that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206A. The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the support plate 510 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in line with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  The concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530, the region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId disposed on the side and the region CCVIe disposed below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb. The upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the lower side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side, The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe. The upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIe and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm conical shape). For this reason, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels substantially in the horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550. Can be made. That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to make a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540. The effect can be improved.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  Although the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, so that the torsion spring 315 can be dispensed with.

  Although the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for production (for example, production of a “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed). it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably disposed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to realize that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not reached until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. The degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised immediately after the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

  Further, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the rising end can be sequentially switched). As a result, it is possible to produce effects in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the motion of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft until the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end (while it is descending), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before starting to move upward after reaching the end. In this case, while pushing the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward motion of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg 5424 is disposed on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end. By configuring the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 can be changed to switch whether the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 is operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher. The deformation amount of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the housing member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed down to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. The variation of the production can be increased.

  For example, if the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays “Press the button.” Or the like, but “Press the button. By displaying such as “Large chance”, it is possible to give the player an effect of specifying how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) by the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, so that the button (tilting device 310) is pressed by the specified pressing method. The player's willingness to operate can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed from the magnitude of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the deformation amount of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310 by force, and the failure which generate | occur | produces by pushing the tilting device 310 in force can be prevented.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to contact the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed, and the weight member is provided on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it can be disposed so as to be unable to contact the housing member 5430. In this case, in the state where the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively, but the effect of the change in the effect mode (expectation) to the player in a way that is difficult to notice the surroundings, such as stopping the vibration when pushed. The difference in degree) can be recognized, so that it is possible to produce a premiere feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode except for the surrounding players. it can.

  As a variation of the production, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desirable to cause both of the arrangement and the arrangement that can be brought into contact with each other, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other due to the shaft cam 5344 being deformed by the shaft has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially extends in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a larger frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 than when the disk cam 5344 contacts the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which both the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to contact the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not contact the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that descends toward the front side, and the front side end portion of the board surface support device 600 in the released state is extended to the back side. You may comprise so that it may arrange | position below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extending plate 621c, and the game board is in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Accordingly, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of left and right bending. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed immediately behind the ball guide opening 53 because the discharge of the ball becomes smooth. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by using a path that bends back and forth, the firing path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is visually recognized lightly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  Although the case where the path | route bent up and down was formed by the channel | path formation ribs 467 and 487 was demonstrated in the said 8th Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of top, bottom, left and right.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched and sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. Even when the load is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451.

  In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the range of the projecting length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, and more than that. In the length range, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

  In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base body side 461B, the intermediate body part 461M, and the distal end side body part 461T jointly by expanding the width in the front-rear direction of the intermediate body part 461M to the same extent as the proximal end body part 461B and the distal end side body part 461T. A large speaker room may be configured.

  Further, the base end side main body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T. However, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the same volume may be used. The arrangement of the speakers 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T are connected). Although the case where they do not overlap with each other in the direction in which they are connected and the direction in which the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 form an opening is described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise so that adjacent rib parts (for example, rib part 467d and rib part 467c) may overlap in the left-right direction view. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. It is possible to suppress fraud by making it difficult to conduct fraud that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraud. In addition, as suppression of fraudulent activity here, suppression of fraudulent act itself, suppression of obtaining an illegal profit by fraudulent act (successful fraudulent act), etc. are illustrated.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the concentration operation. Can be made. Thereby, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  The loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a structure that expands and contracts with the rotation of the rotating plate 830 may be used, or a structure that rotates on a shaft different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830 may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940 are connected, so that the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing regulating unit 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). As the right side of the board 13 is tilted to the front side), the part of the game board 13 disposed opposite to the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the board support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is determined whether or not 600 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 that are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface that is disposed above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thereby, since the function which determines the state of the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 installed in the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunction cover member 171, the freedom degree of design of the multifunction cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not contact the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600, so that the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light applied to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, it is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a case where the other surface is disposed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around a certain axis), it is possible to switch the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86. In addition, by changing the correspondence between the mode of light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving agent that projects inwardly of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the production.

  That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is caused to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 has a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory disposed opposite to the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (location closer to the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the side of 560 faces the mobile agent side, the mobile agent that is disposed to face the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, the light emission location of the mobile accessory can be switched by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light.

  In this case, for example, the production effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emission location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving agent, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes on the moving agent side, while the surface changes on the outer cover member 560 side while contracting and changing so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524. The moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so that it expands (extends) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 at the timing of facing. Thereby, the change which changes the location which light-emits according to operation | movement of a moving accessory can be implement | achieved by switching the attitude | position of the right panel unit 500, making the change of LED512a which controls light emission unnecessary.

  In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the luminance is increased, the light amount is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or mobile accessory).

  Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed to the moving accessory or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving accessory or liquid crystal). In this case, the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510). While irradiating, light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving agent or the liquid crystal. As a result, only the details of the mobile agent and the liquid crystal can be emitted, and a wide range of light can be emitted from positions away from the mobile agent and the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken due to a load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is so weak that the folded portion falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position that passes when the folded portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and control is performed so as to forcibly stop the launch of the ball. It is possible to minimize the profits (losses incurred by the gaming machine hall) that can be obtained by those who perform cheating.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-like hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be disposed to make a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

  Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the both-side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the recessed portion.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the light traveling direction is set to the direction for collecting light or the direction for spreading light. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclined upward in all the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to be played is selected. It is possible to make the light easily travel toward. As a result, the customer collection effect of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

  Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in regions CCVIc and CCVIe that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId that are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, since the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player who is playing the pachinko 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction, the machine body to be played is selected. The light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling to the player side and the light emitted to the inner lens member 530 tilts downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to produce an effect in which the sphere stored in the upper plate 17 is illuminated with light to make the sphere look gorgeous. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operation device having an operation means for a player to push in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means protrudes from the player in the first state. 2 states are provided, and biasing means for biasing the operation means from the first state toward the second state is provided, and the pushing direction of the operation means in the second state is from the back side to the player. A gaming machine A1 that is directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the player performs an effect in a manner that increases the expectation of the jackpot for the player at the advanced position, so that the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. Therefore, it was necessary to design the strength of the operation means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole, and the drive means for driving the operation means is enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the near side for the player. In this case, the momentum of the push-in can be released by causing the portion that cannot be divided into operations as a slip between the player's hand and the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation means is pushed in and operated around the shoulder and elbow based on the player's gaming posture, it is difficult to apply force in the forward direction, so the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operation means. Can do.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable about a shaft bar disposed on the back side for the player, configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft bar, and includes the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means places the operation means in a direction opposite to the player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that in the second state, It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed in easily, so a new push-in operation method that is difficult to push acceleration can be provided. The operation device can be prevented from being damaged by the player's pushing operation.

  The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the left hand little finger near the shaft and placing the hand in the vertical position so that the thumb is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating in a tilted state, a method of operating in a mode in which the palm is dropped toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is positioned facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a drive means for generating a drive force of the automatic operation. The drive force of the drive device is a push operation by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in a direction to play and does not work in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so the driving force in the direction opposite to the player operating direction. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the push-in operation of the button is possible, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load by being pulled from the player in the reverse direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further includes a maintenance unit that operates by the driving unit, and the driving unit includes the eccentric unit via the eccentric portion. The rotating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means is capable of changing the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase, while maintaining the maintaining means. In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is released, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means remains in the maintenance state, and the movement to release the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, it is possible to change the movement range in which the operation device moves by the biasing means. Accordingly, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

  In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means can be moved in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement in the direction of the urging force of the urging means was caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement was limited to one way. Since the movement mode of moving following the maintenance unit can be added to the operation unit, the type of movement mode of the operation unit can be increased. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes a light emitting means that is disposed inside the operation device and that emits light toward the player, and in the second state as compared with the first state. However, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, from the player's viewpoint, the area of the operation means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. As the light irradiation range is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the light and improve the production effect, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming By setting it as the aspect which is, it can reduce the player's power at the time of operation.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves close to and away from the display means between the display means and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves to and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Points that enable repetitive strikes but have low repulsion during normal times>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which an operation range to the terminal position is wide as compared to the first state And a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating the biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operation means is automatically operated by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operation means does not follow the player's operation, so that it is difficult for the player to perform the continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, while the return of the operating means is desired to be faster. Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operation means with the two drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 includes continuous hitting determination means for determining whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means. A game machine B2 that determines whether or not to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not the second driving means is driven based on the detection value of the continuous hit determining means, the player is not performing a continuous hit operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press) It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back until the second driving means operates until the operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the end detection means for detecting the position of the operation means and detecting whether or not the operation means is arranged at the end position, and whether or not the operation means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a movement direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the end position detecting means and the detected value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the step is a direction returning from the pushing end to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction returning from the push-in end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is moved from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is constituted by a voice coil motor that is oscillated and displaced along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to generate a driving force for moving the operating means by effectively using the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operation means, and the second drive means elastically supports the drive motor that rotates an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A support means, and the support means has a driving force that moves the operation means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state as the operation means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position and generates a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operation means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the fact that the operation means is arranged at the end position, and makes contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction close to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points where VCM is used as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means is provided, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measurement means for measuring the speed of the operation means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measurement means A threshold value judging means for judging whether or not the measurement value measured by the above is a predetermined threshold value or more, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value judging means The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the importance of being lightly operated by the player is emphasized, the operation resistance may be reduced and the operation means may be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of the operation means being damaged can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases, and the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a less powerful player. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination unit determines whether the speed of the operation unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion unit is increased. Therefore, the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary while reducing the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value. Therefore, operability can be improved and destruction can be prevented by the repulsion means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. The voice coil motor is driven in advance before the control is performed to push the voice coil motor to the extended position and the operation means is disposed at a position where the operation means can contact the voice coil motor. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is disposed at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before starting, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operation means and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C3 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are brought into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor. The degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repelling means is disposed so as to be in contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by movement of the operating means by spring elasticity. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the deformation amount by spring elasticity, so that the driving force can be driven without a time delay even when the movement speed of the operation means is high. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold with the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. Thus, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the end in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable region of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the side in contact with the operation means is narrowed. The elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the speed is high.

<Driving means is prevented from being damaged by interrupting transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the releasing means outputs the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that a large load is generated in the drive system when the operation means is operated during the automatic operation when the operation means is automatically operated for the production. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operation means exceeds a predetermined amount via the transmission means. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means when the operation means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system is suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction that is opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction, The game machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving means, the operation means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. In such a case, a large load may be generated in the driving unit. For this reason, the degree of freedom in rendering when operating the operating means to produce is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, or the release member moves in the release direction. Switch whether to move in the reverse direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two types of release pattern and non-release pattern), but in both cases it is necessary to discontinue the driving force.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

  An example of a method for releasing transmission is that the clutch moves in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, the purpose of excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a biasing unit that biases the driving unit and the transmission unit to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the release unit is a contact portion between the driving unit and the transmission unit And engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both surfaces opposite to the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers away from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means engages the driving force in the engaged state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since the engaging teeth are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces facing the operation direction of the driving means taper away from the abutting surface, the transmitting means is separated from the driving means by the engagement of the engaging teeth. It can be made to separate, and thereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

  Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means is separated from the driving means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the driving means via the engagement teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

  In addition, the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit as the transmission unit is further away from the driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission unit and the drive unit increases.

  In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of completely disappearing. Thereby, when a player releases a hand, a button can be started to operate within a short time.

  In other words, when the button is driven as “production”, if the player holds the button, one phase of the button operation elapses. And if the player releases the hand on the way, moving from the end of the one phase will increase the period that the button is stopped, and reduce the feeling that the player has started to move because the load on the player has been released. Can be removed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player has started moving because the player's load has been solved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface of the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed in a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other, the transmission means and the release means abut against each other and the transfer of the release means Stopping the movement along the direction approaching and separating from the means can be suppressed. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is canceled without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is the operation mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive unit when there is a difference between whether the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the predetermined period of time is different.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

  Here, the difference in the operation mode of the operation means is entangled with information that will be beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation, so that the operation mode of the operation means to the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. Can watch over.

  In addition, since the difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can do. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound, so the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance. Can observe the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the cam rotation>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, A first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position toward the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position toward the second position by the urging force of the urging means. And a terminal means for forming the movable terminal of the first and second movement terminals in a changeable manner, wherein the first means engages with the operation means to suppress a change in position of the operation means. 1 means of said operation Release load means for giving the first means a load for releasing the engagement with the means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the movement end of the operating means in the end means are a single A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is performed by the driving means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operating means operated by the cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by the releasing load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is extended. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by a termination means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the extension operation of the operation means is changed depending on the cam phase at the time of unlocking, the cam phase at the time of unlocking is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation operate with different driving forces. Accordingly, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the drive means for changing the end position of the operating means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of drive means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1, the change of the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

  As a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection rotating coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation period between the cam and the projection, An example is a method in which the cam rotation and the projection rotation are out of synchronization when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the cam rotation and projection rotation are synchronized in the other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the release load means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Therefore, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation period is different, so the second rotating means Plural types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

  According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state in which the operation means is maintained at the first position and a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared when moving toward the second position. , Can widen the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually separating the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In the operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a first position of the operation means, and a second position reached by the operation means when the player operates from the first position. A gaming machine comprising: a vibrating means configured to move between and having a vibrating part that vibrates; and a receiving means arranged so as to come into contact with the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, while the vibrating part is in a separated state incapable of coming into contact with the receiving means, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating part is brought into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 that is in a contact state.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with operating means that can be operated by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibrations to the player via the operating means or the casing of the gaming machine (for example, JP (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the chassis of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the housing of the gaming machine, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means when performing the effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means, and an operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operation means at the moment when the operation means is pressed). In some cases, the start of vibration may not be in time before releasing the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Therefore, even when the vibration unit is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibration part occurs before the player pushes in, the vibration part can be vibrated before the player releases his hand regardless of the player's mode of operation. The vibration can be transmitted to the person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. Thus, the gaming machine F2 is changed to the contact state when the vibrating means is taken out of the occupied area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration part can be changed, and the intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means can position the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent transmission of vibration, and displacement generated in the vibration means during vibration can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3, in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means are brought into contact by using the elasticity of the supporting means. That is, momentum can be applied when the vibrating portion moves in a direction closer to the receiving means due to expansion and contraction of the supporting means.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operation direction of the operation means is lower than the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

  Thereby, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operation means is slight, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of expansion / contraction of the support means, and it is possible to make a difference in the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means. .

  In addition, as a method of varying the deformation resistance, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operation direction of the operation means, or the support means surrounds the vibration means. When the rubber member is composed of a rubber member, a method of changing the deformation resistance in each direction by manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding, and a rail that guides the operation means in a direction along the operation direction Examples of the method include a coil spring that urges the vibration means along the operation direction of the operation means.

  In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is said receiving means, and said receiving means is configured as a means different from said operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but vibration is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the drive means via the operation means and the transmission means, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive means. Thereby, durability of a drive means can be improved.

  Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the player's hand operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration during the operation from stopping the operation.

  In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a part near the upper plate to which a game ball is supplied or an edge part of a glass frame, etc., without being conscious of the player during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the mounting part>
An operation device having an operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit. The transmission unit includes a deforming portion that is elastically deformed by an overload. A gaming machine G1 to play.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, operating means operable by a player, driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the driving means is gripped and fixed by the player, if the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, or the transmitting means There is a problem that loads are accumulated in the connecting portions between the driving means and the drive means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operation device, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, thereby connecting the operation means and the transmission means, or the drive means and the transmission means. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deforming portion forms a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the rotating portion is moved to the rotating shaft by the elasticity of the deforming portion. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that a fixed force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion that bears elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion that generates the supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, the structure of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the function. For example, an individual fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion protruding in parallel with the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is inclined.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be performed, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to configure the cam member and the projecting portion with a single member, which may increase the number of members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is in a mode in which the rotation shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is compared with the rotation shaft in comparison with a first rotation direction in which the cam member rotates about a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the protruding portion. Deformation resistance is increased in the second rotation direction in which the second rotation direction is rotated about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the protruding portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformation portion for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis direction, Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member moves, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deforming portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member abut.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  Any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, comprising a detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is inclined and displaced with respect to the shaft.

  Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred based on the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is small, but the configuration of the detection means becomes complicated and expensive as the arrangement interval of the detection means is reduced. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the shaft. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goto with thread. Game machine H>
In a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows passage of the flowing down game ball. A gaming machine H1 comprising unidirectional obstruction means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act performed by placing a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding a game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball connected with the thread into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of launch and the thread is cut with the tension generated at that time, if the launching strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball will not be able to cut the thread completely. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, prepare a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread, and launch one game ball connected to one end of the thread with low firing strength to flow into the foul ball path and return it to the player side. While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball path. The game ball and the other game ball can be connected to each other with a thread, so that the other game ball is placed in the game area by applying a load to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way blocking means can be used even when a fraudulent act that applies a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profits by obstructing the movement of the yarn in the backward direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  In the gaming machine H2, the bending section includes a load unit that applies a load to the object that flows backward without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bending.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object (for example, a thread-like member) that flows backward by the loading means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion that is recessed with a width less than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding, and the loading means is broken. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 is provided with regulation means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path is restricted by the restriction means, so that between the thread-like member and the load means When the load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage so that the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion that is provided with a receiving tray that is a tray that first arrives on the front side of the front door, and the receiving tray is a portion that discharges the game ball discharged from the payout device The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the paying device passes through the front of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball path, thereby allowing the game ball to pass through the foul ball path. When an illegal act that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area is intentionally applied to the game ball to be paid out, the load is applied and the durability of the thread is reduced. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a portion for discharging the game balls discharged from the payout device, to the receiving tray that is a tray that the foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door is The gaming machine H7 is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In some cases, it is possible to easily damage the yarn by the game balls to be paid out.

<Structure of the panel presser. Gaming Machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. It comprises state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an usable state, which is a usable state, and the state changing means includes the gaming means in the use state. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is provided with proximity means that is close to the game means from the one side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be detached from the inner frame, which can be rotated in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means can be changed in state only after the game board is pushed into the use position, so that when the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means that comes close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means abuts against the game board and exerts an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position of use by adding a pushing force.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that disables the gaming means. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means is disabled. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retreats outward from the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the gaming means removal work can be improved and Since this process is performed in accordance with the state of disabling the means, work efficiency can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, since the state change means changes to an available state when the contact means receives a load from the game means, the operation state can be used as a series of flows by pressing the game means against the state change means. The state can be changed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is configured such that one side of the receiving means is supported by a shaft and the other side is approached to be received by the receiving means, and the state changing means is the receiving means. It is arranged on the other side of the game machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

  Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 includes a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means cannot be used so that the state changing means cannot use the gaming means. When maintaining the state, a gaming machine I6, comprising a blockage restricting section that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether the gaming means can be used depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. Whether or not to do so can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means is kept in an unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming Machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the game means and the game means. A gaming machine J1 comprising an arrangement means arranged on a path communicating with the outside, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against a fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573) ). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is only one place for preventing fraud and the effect of preventing fraud is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, since the arrangement means is arranged in a path in which the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, it prevents fraud. The effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different between a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location and a second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it suppresses entry of members from outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in the first place and the second place because the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside is different. As compared with the case where the number of the members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

  In addition, the method of suppressing the approach from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking a route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the placement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed from a cup shape that opens toward the outside of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, whereby further intrusion of the invading member can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting an electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restricting portion in a path from the outside to the game means. Characteristic gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, in addition to detecting the change (such as disconnection due to heat) that occurs in the wiring due to the high heat at the time of occurrence of fraud that penetrates the entry restriction portion due to the high heat, The effect which suppresses the approach of a member can be made easy to produce.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the placement means includes a cancellation means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the member that entered from the outside is guided by the placement means to the cancellation area far from the gaming means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent a member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of decorative plate with 5 sheets. Including fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first means and a second means, which are opposed to each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. And a third means comprising a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means that are arranged opposite to each other and connected at at least one side are disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the vehicle. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

  The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction adjacent thereto and fitting them together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes a coupled means coupled to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting that occurs by displacing the second means relative to the first means in the third direction adjacent to the connected means, so that the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and Resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside, the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if it is a case where the fraudulent act which destroys a fitting part and decomposes | disassembles a 1st means and a 2nd means arises, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same direction as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction of the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, the light irradiating means for irradiating light toward the first means or the second means and being fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means And a light guide unit configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation unit into the inside of the game machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

  In the gaming machine K6, the gaming machine K7 is provided with an abutting means for surface abutting in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K6, maintaining an interval corresponding to the size of the abutting means in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. Can do. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can do.

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to disassemble, even if a load is applied in the opposite direction. can do.

<Point L that utilizes light guiding means that bends. As point, it is not achieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means for projecting light that is disposed opposite to the light guide means and passes through the light guide means, The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion that is disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion that is disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface emitting light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target device includes the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing even if the intensity of light incident on the light guide device is constant. The light emission intensity of the projection means can be changed by the unit.

  In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is configured such that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light of can be improved.

  The gaming machine L2 includes an opposite projection unit that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target unit with the light guide unit interposed therebetween, and that projects the light that has passed through the light guide unit. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guiding means are formed of substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, a portion of the back projection means that is disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guide means and a portion that is disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guide means are light Since the transmission is formed of substantially the same material, when the same light is incident on the light guide means, the light effect mode viewed through the projection means and the light effect mode viewed through the opposite projection means Can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming Machine M>
A first means and a second means which are disposed opposite to each other and are fixed to each other and constitute an internal space in a fixed state; acoustic means disposed in a state where at least a part of the internal space enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right end portions of a front frame, and an effect is produced by sound output from the speakers (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave that travels to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and is sent out of the gaming machine, so that an effect that makes the bass sound easy to be performed There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in the opposing direction, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising a projecting portion projecting from the projecting portion, and a projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means Is brought into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means as a result of fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the internal space and the outside, and the opening passes through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 that is blocked by the above.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, A wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed with the passage member passing from the internal space to the outside.

  In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being sandwiched between the projecting portions and being disconnected. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means that is arranged below the support fastening means and produces an effect accompanying the game A gaming machine M5, wherein the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the presentation means from below, so that the weight of the support fastening means is reduced without compressing the space used for the presentation. Things can be adopted.

<Moveable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop along the way. Game machine N>
A base member, first displacement means supported by the base member so as to be displaceable, drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state that is displaced in the displacement direction of the first displacement means, In a gaming machine comprising a second displacement means switchable between a non-following state that is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacing means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacing means (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same direction of displacement when the first displacement means expands / contracts, resulting in a slow performance and insufficient effect. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so the displacement speed of the second displacement means is increased. The speed can be visually recognized with reference to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels as a bodily sensation can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

  The gaming machine N1 includes a resistance unit that generates a resistance against the displacement of the second displacement unit, and the resistance unit is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. A gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, due to the action of the resistance means, a follow-up state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and a non-follow-up state that deviates from the follow-up state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is disposed so as to be visible from the front.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the player can visually recognize the resistance means with the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can be shared with the function as a production device.

  The gaming machine N4 includes rod-like shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means so as to be rotatable coaxially. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so the first displacement means, As the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the posture of the other member or means also changes so as to prevent the displacement resistance from rising excessively. Can do.

<Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. As point, it is not achieved>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a storage means configured to be able to receive the first means, wherein the storage means is an opening that receives the first means when the first means is received. A gaming machine O1 comprising: one opening, and a second opening opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, a special game machine). (See JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 includes the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign substances are accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. Thereby, the situation where a foreign material remains inside can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the storage means includes a low water-resistant part with low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water-resistant part.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water-resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward through the second opening. That is, it can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured with a shape based on a shape projected with a different direction of the solid object. A gaming machine O4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed from shapes based on different shapes of solid objects. The solid object can be easily removed through the section.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means, the gaming machine O5.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player in a state where the solid object closes part of the second opening. Can be made. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, and thus the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. .

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A gaming machine Z1, wherein in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A gaming machine Z2, wherein in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A gaming machine Z3, wherein in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
12 Inner frame (accepting means)
13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Top plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way blocking means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul sphere passage (foul sphere passage)
159 Open / close restriction part (blockage restriction part)
173 Long cover member (part of resolving means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion restriction part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation device 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
311gR Right-side detection piece (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft bar)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Driving device (driving means, first driving means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connecting pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintaining means, part of first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 Front side assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
480 Rear side assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R Right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib (contact means)
540 Light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Protruding portion (part of connecting portion)
600 Board support device (state change means)
620 Claw member before rotation (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 Petal (part of second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 Free fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul Sphere Passage (Foul Sphere Passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintaining means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulatory part (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (support means, part of repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c 3rd through-hole (a part of 2nd opening part)
9142a Right slope (part of the payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of the recessed portion)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
E1 Notification device (detection means)
P1a deformation part (deformation part)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 clearance

Claims (3)

A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side that faces the game means and that can receive the game means from the one side;
The receiving means includes an arrangement means arranged in a path communicating between the gaming means and the outside,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations. The arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location;
A second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at the second location;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein entry of members from outside is suppressed by different methods.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed from a cup shape that is opened outward of the receiving means.

Images